JP7404018B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

Among gaming machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player, there are machines that can perform suggestive effects that suggest the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state. .

In this type of gaming machine, there is one that can execute a multi-stage reach effect in which the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state increases as the suggestion effect progresses (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-348951

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, as the reach effect develops, there is a higher possibility that it will be controlled to an advantageous state. There was a problem that it could not be increased appropriately.

The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suitably increase expectations for being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance that displays a predetermined image and outputs sound at a predetermined volume;
special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see;
A first specific performance that is executable after the special performance and that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state, and a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first specific performance is executed. a second specific performance that suggests; a specific performance execution means capable of executing;
When executing the second specific effect, a special notification effect can be executed to notify that the second specific effect will be executed after the special effect and before starting the second specific effect. Special notification performance execution means,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect that suggests control to the advantageous state by switching and displaying a plurality of types of suggestion images;
Equipped with
Lowering the sound output below the predetermined volume for a predetermined period after executing the special effect,
The special notification performance execution means notifies that the second specific performance will be executed by switching and displaying a plurality of types of specific images,
In the special notification effect, the period from when one specific image is displayed to when it is switched to another specific image is the period from when one specific image is displayed to when it is switched to another specific image in the above-mentioned suggestion effect. It is shorter than the period until it is displayed.
The special notification performance execution means is capable of switching and displaying a specific image larger than the suggestion image ,
The specific image is an image that includes a character,
The special notification performance execution means is capable of displaying an image that does not include a character when switching from one specific image to another specific image.
It is characterized by
Moreover, the gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance that displays a predetermined image and outputs sound at a predetermined volume;
special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see;
A first specific performance that is executable after the special performance and that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state, and a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first specific performance is executed. a second specific performance that suggests; a specific performance execution means capable of executing;
When executing the second specific effect, a special notification effect can be executed to notify that the second specific effect will be executed after the special effect and before starting the second specific effect. Special notification performance execution means,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect that suggests control to the advantageous state by switching and displaying a plurality of types of suggestion images;
Equipped with
Lowering the sound output below the predetermined volume for a predetermined period after executing the special effect,
The special notification performance execution means notifies that the second specific performance will be executed by switching and displaying a plurality of types of specific images,
In the special notification effect, the period from when one specific image is displayed to when it is switched to another specific image is the period from when one specific image is displayed to when it is switched to another specific image in the above-mentioned suggestion effect. It is characterized by a shorter period of time than the display period.
According to these features, when the second specific effect is executed, after a predetermined period in which the predetermined image is made difficult to see due to the special effect and the output of sound and light is suppressed, the specific image is displayed rather than the suggestive effect. By executing a special notification effect that quickly switches and displays the information, expectations for being controlled in an advantageous state can be gradually improved.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, a jackpot type determination table, a small hit type determination table, and a jackpot type. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for game control. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for performance control and a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows random numerical value judgment processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows small hit release preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows small hit end processing. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A and jackpot B. It is an explanatory view showing the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C and jackpot D. It is an explanatory view showing variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol process processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of normal symbols and an opening pattern of a normal electric accessory. It is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a symbol confirmation period and an opening/closing period of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows a part of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows panel display production processing. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the display pattern determination ratio and each display pattern of panel display performance. 3 is a flowchart showing result image display processing. It is a flowchart which shows background image update processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start processing. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the second special symbol when controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the second special symbol when controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E. It is a flowchart which shows preview production decision processing. It is an explanatory diagram of the performance pattern determination ratio of the preview performance and each performance pattern. It is a flowchart which shows ending effect processing. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the image display device at the end of the jackpot game. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the image display device in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A. It is a diagram showing the display mode of the image display device in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B. It is a diagram showing a display mode of the image display device in a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D and jackpot E. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a process for determining a suggestion effect during rear variable display in modification example 239SG-1. It is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance to be executed as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display and the performance pattern of the jackpot suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance to be executed as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display in Modified Example 239SG-1. It is a figure showing the determination ratio of the production pattern of the jackpot suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of setting suggestion production. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination process during front part variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performances to be executed as suggestion performances during the front variable display when the execution of the jackpot suggestion production has been decided, and (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the production to be executed as the suggestion production during the front variable display. (C) is a diagram showing a performance pattern of a character performance and a timer performance to be performed as a suggestion performance during the front variable display. (D) is a diagram showing the jackpot expectation level of character performance and timer performance and the execution expectation level of setting suggestion performance. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns of character performance, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns of timer performance, and (C) is a diagram showing the contents of each performance pattern of timer performance. It is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the performance execution period in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns. (A) is a diagram showing a table for determining a preview performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the preview performance. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of preview performance. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the configuration of effects of super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of super reach α1. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of super reach β2. (A) is a diagram comparing the performance contents of the first stage performance and the second stage performance, and (B) is a timing chart showing the display status of dialogue. (A) is a timing chart showing changes in display, sound, and light output levels in normal reach, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of a reach title. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of a first-stage performance and a second-stage performance. (A) is a diagram showing changes in the switching performance, (B) is a diagram comparing the preview performance and the switching performance, and (C) is a diagram comparing the display periods of the preview performance and the switching performance. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of switching performance. (I) to (L) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of switching performance. (A) and (B) are timing charts showing an example of a super reach performance operation in the first modified example of the characteristic part 175SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing example 1 of special effects, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing example 2 of special effects. (A) to (H) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of super reach performance operations as modified examples. Similarly, (I) to (L) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of super reach performance operations as modified examples.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(Characteristic part 239SG form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A variable display is performed based on the establishment of an execution condition (for example, winning a prize in the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening with a game ball), and when the variable display result becomes a predetermined result (for example, a small hit). Control is performed to a predetermined gaming state (e.g., small winning gaming state), and an advantageous state (e.g., A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state),
A game control means that can control the gaming state after the end of the advantageous state to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the execution conditions are more likely to be met than the normal state (for example, the CPU 103 performs the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 10-17) ) and
A display means (for example, a panel for characters A to D as shown in FIG. 10-36(C)) capable of displaying a plurality of types of special displays related to variable display (for example, panels for characters A to D as shown in FIG. 10-36(C)) when controlled to the special state. an image display device 5);
Equipped with
As the special display, the display means may display a first special display corresponding to one variable display (for example, a second special display after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A as shown in FIG. 10-36(C)). A panel of characters A to C corresponding to the time-saving state for variable display of symbols) and a second special display corresponding to multiple variable displays (for example, as shown in Figure 10-37(B), Panel of character D corresponding to the time saving state for variable display of the second special symbol three times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B (Character D compatible panel for the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B)) It is characterized by being able to display
According to this feature, different special displays are displayed depending on the number of variable displays executed in the special state, so that the interest in the special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
A first pattern (for example, when the variable display result becomes the predetermined result, control is performed to a predetermined gaming state, and control is made to an advantageous state when the gaming medium passes through a specific area during the predetermined gaming state) In the case of a small hit, the game ball passes through the third count switch 239SG024B during the small win game and is controlled to the jackpot game state), and when the variable display result becomes a specific result, a predetermined A second pattern that is controlled to an advantageous state without being controlled by the gaming state (for example, a part where, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the part is controlled to the jackpot gaming state instead of being controlled to the small winning gaming state); has
The game control means is
The special state is a first special state that ends when one variable display is executed (for example, a first special state that targets one variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A). A second special state in which the special state ends when the variable display is executed multiple times (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B) (time-saving state), and can be controlled to
Even in the advantageous state due to the second pattern, it is possible to control to the second special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the jackpot type is a jackpot). By being B, after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B, the part that is controlled to be in a time-saving state that targets the variable display of the second special symbol three times),
The display means is capable of displaying the second special display even in the second special state that is controlled after the advantageous state of the second pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-37, when the jackpot B is In the time saving state that targets the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the end of the game, a panel corresponding to character D is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the special state after the advantageous state according to the second pattern.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or Form 2,
The game control means is configured to control, as the special state, a first special state that ends when one variable display is executed (for example, one second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A). (time saving state that targets the variable display of) and a second special state in which the special state ends when the variable display is executed multiple times (for example, a second special state that occurs three times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B). A time-saving state that targets variable display of symbols) and can be controlled to
The display means is capable of displaying the first special display and the second special display when controlled to the first special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-36(C), when the jackpot A (a part where the panels of characters A to D can be displayed in the panel display performance in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game),
When the second special display is displayed while being controlled to the first special state, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the first special display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-26). As such, when character D is displayed as a panel display effect in the time saving state that targets the variable display of the second special symbol once after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, character A to character are displayed as the panel display effect. (The part where the percentage of variable display results being a jackpot is set higher than when C is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest when the second special display is displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect in a plurality of different modes in the special state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a panel display effect process or a second mode compatible effect process as shown in FIG. 10-24) part) and
When the initially controlled advantageous state ends after passing from the normal state to the predetermined gaming state, selection performance execution means (for example, FIG. 10-34 and FIG. As shown in 10-35, the performance control CPU 120 executes performance mode determination processing during the ending performance after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A and jackpot B, so that the performance mode can be changed to the first mode and the first mode by the player's operation. 2 modes (selectable part),
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in the manner selected by the selected effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-25, if the effect mode is set to the first mode, the panel display effect is executed). and if the production mode is set to the second mode, a part that executes a production compatible with the second mode that is different from the panel display production)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the player can select the performance mode of the specific performance, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 4,
When the second special display is displayed on the display means, a special performance execution means (for example, a panel display performance shown in FIG. 10-24 by the performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a special performance (for example, a panel display performance) (a part that executes processing),
The game control means is configured to control, as the special state, a first special state that ends when one variable display is executed (for example, one second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A). (time saving state that targets the variable display of) and a second special state in which the special state ends when the variable display is executed multiple times (for example, a second special state that occurs three times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B). A time-saving state that targets variable display of symbols) and can be controlled to
The special effect is a plurality of effects corresponding to each of the plurality of variable displays in the second special state related to the second special display, and whether or not the predetermined result is obtained for each variable display. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to execute a success/failure performance (for example, the success/failure reporting performance shown in FIG. 10-37) that indicates the success or failure of a given item.
According to this feature, the interest in the second special state can be further improved.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
At least in the normal state, a related effect that displays a related display related to the second special display (for example, an image of character D) on the display means, and an unrelated display not related to the second special display (for example, FIG. 10 -33 (B), a production execution means capable of executing an unrelated production (display of lines such as "chance!", "hot!", "super hot!") on the display means (e.g. , a part for executing a variable display performance process after the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 10-32),
The performance execution means is capable of executing the related performance at a higher rate than the unrelated performance when controlled to at least one of a predetermined gaming state and an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33). As shown, when the image of character D is displayed on the image display device 5 as a preview effect, the rate of change is higher than when lines such as "Chance!", "Hot!", and "Super Hot!" are displayed. (The part where the display result is a jackpot)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the interest can be further improved when the second special display is displayed.

(Characteristic part 175SG form)
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect that displays a predetermined image and outputs sound at a predetermined volume (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a normal reach effect in super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2) and,
a special effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a shutter effect or a blackout effect) capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see;
Information display performance execution means that can execute an information display performance that suggests control to the advantageous state by displaying information after the special performance (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a first stage performance and a second stage performance) part) and
Equipped with
The information display performance is
a first information display effect (for example, a first stage effect) that displays first information composed of a first number of information;
a second information display performance (for example, a subsequent stage performance) that can be executed after the first information display performance and displays second information composed of information of a second number different from the first number;
including;
The information display performance execution means includes:
The second information can be displayed in a display mode with a higher degree of emphasis than the display mode of the first information (for example, the lines in the later stage production can be displayed in a display mode with a higher degree of emphasis than the display mode of the lines in the first stage production. (See Figure 11-8 (A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to gradually improve expectations for being controlled to an advantageous state by information display performance.

The gaming machine of Form 1-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1-1,
The information display effect execution means is capable of dividing the first information into a plurality of pieces of information and sequentially displaying them in the first information display effect, and dividing the second information into a plurality of pieces of information in the second information display effect. (See Figure 11-8 (A) and (B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to gradually improve expectations for being controlled to an advantageous state by information display performance.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-3 is the gaming machine described in Embodiment 1-2,
The second number is smaller than the first number (for example, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 and second period th2 of the first stage performance is smaller than the number of characters displayed in the first period th3 and second period th4 of the second stage performance). (The number of characters is greater than the number of characters displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the second information has a smaller amount of information than the first information and is displayed in an emphasized manner, the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state by the information display effect is gradually reduced. can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 1-4 is the gaming machine described in Form 1-3,
The number displayed as the second information in one period in the second information display effect is smaller than the number displayed as the first information in one period in the first information display effect (for example, each supermarket For reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3, and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second period th2. (2) More than the number of characters displayed in the predetermined period th4.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the second information has a smaller amount of information than the first information and is displayed in an emphasized manner, the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state by the information display effect is gradually reduced. can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-4,
The manner in which the display of the first information is ended in the first information display performance (for example, a fade-out manner), and the manner in which the display of the second information is ended in the second information display performance (for example, a frame The feature is that the out mode is different from the out mode.
According to this feature, since the manner in which the display ends is different between the first information and the second information, it is possible to gradually improve expectations for being controlled to an advantageous state by the information display effect.

The gaming machine of Form 1-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-5,
A manner in which display of the first information is started in the first information display performance (for example, a fade-in manner) and a manner in which display of the second information is started in the second information display performance (for example, It is characterized by a different frame-in mode).
According to this feature, since the manner in which the first information and the second information are started to be displayed is different, it is possible to gradually improve expectations for being controlled to an advantageous state by the information display effect.

The gaming machine of Form 1-7 is the gaming machine described in Form 1-6,
After the first information display performance and before starting the second information display performance, special performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120 is characterized in that it includes a part that can perform a switching effect in which character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 (specific images) corresponding to a plurality of types of characters A to C are switched and displayed.
According to this feature, by executing a special effect of switching and displaying a specific image before transitioning from the first information display effect to the second information display effect, the information display effect can be controlled to an advantageous state. Expectations can be improved step by step.

The gaming machine of form 1-8 is the gaming machine described in form 1-7,
The specific image is characterized in that it is a character image (for example, character images 175SG001 to 175SG003).
According to this feature, interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 1-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-8,
A specific performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute super reach performances A to D) that can execute a specific performance that suggests that the system is controlled to be in the advantageous state;
After the second information display performance, a notification performance execution means that can execute a notification performance that notifies that the specific performance will be executed (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute reach title performances A to D) and,
It is characterized by having the following.
According to this feature, expectations for a specific performance can be increased.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-10 is the gaming machine described in Embodiment 1-9,
The execution period of the notification effect is shorter than at least one of the first information display period in the first information display effect and the second information display period in the second information display effect (for example, The execution period td1 to td4 of the reach title performance is shorter than the execution period tb1 of the first stage performance and the execution period tc1 of the second stage performance.See Figure 11-5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the notification effect from becoming redundant while increasing expectations for the specific effect.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-10,
The information display performance execution means can dynamically display at least one of the first information and the second information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays a plurality of character images 175SG008 each consisting of one character (for example, , "mi", "ra", "ku", "ru") are displayed (dynamically displayed) in such a way that they rotate sequentially from the right side of the display screen toward the center during the first predetermined period th3 (frame-in). ))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-11,
The information display performance execution means outputs at least one of sound output and light output at a first output amount in the first information display performance, and outputs at least one of the sound output and light output in the second information display performance. Output at a second output amount that is higher than the first output amount (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 makes the output level of display, sound, and light higher for the latter stage performance than for the first stage performance. Figure 11-9 (See (A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the information display effect can be enhanced step by step.

The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect that displays a predetermined image and outputs sound at a predetermined volume (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a normal reach effect in super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2) and,
a special effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a shutter effect or a blackout effect) capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see;
A first specific performance (for example, super reach performance A, B) that can be executed after the special performance and suggests that the control is in the advantageous state; A second specific performance (for example, super reach performances C, D) that suggests a high probability of being controlled to an advantageous state; (the part where D can be executed), and
When executing the second specific effect, a special notification effect can be executed to notify that the second specific effect will be executed after the special effect and before starting the second specific effect. Special notification performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute the switching performance),
Suggestion effect execution means that can execute a suggestion effect that suggests control to be in the advantageous state by switching and displaying a plurality of types of suggestion images (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute preview effects A to C) part) and
Equipped with
During a predetermined period after executing the special effect, the sound output is lowered below the predetermined volume (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 starts a shutter effect or a blackout effect, the output level of display, sound, and light is reduced). The part to be lowered (see Figure 11-9(A)),
The special notification performance execution means notifies that the second specific performance will be executed by switching and displaying a plurality of types of specific images (for example, switching when the performance control CPU 120 is in super reach β1, β2). (The part that executes the performance)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the second specific effect is executed, the specific image is switched and displayed after a predetermined period in which the predetermined image is made difficult to see due to the special effect and the output of sound and light is suppressed has elapsed. By executing the special notification effect, expectations for being controlled in an advantageous state can be gradually improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 2-1,
In the special notification effect, the period from when one specific image is displayed to when it is switched to another specific image (for example, display period tg1) is the period from when the first suggestion image is displayed in the suggestion effect. It is shorter than the period (for example, display period tf1) until switching to another suggestion image and displaying it (see Figure 11-11(C))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the second specific effect is executed, after a predetermined period in which the predetermined image is made difficult to see due to the special effect and the output of sound and light is suppressed, the specific image is displayed rather than the suggestive effect. By executing a special notification effect that is quickly switched and displayed, expectations for being controlled in an advantageous state can be gradually improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 2-1 or Form 2-2,
The special notification performance execution means can switch and display the specific image that is larger than the suggestion image (see FIG. 11-11(B)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing a special notification effect in which a specific image larger than a predetermined image is switched and displayed, expectations for being controlled in an advantageous state can be gradually improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-3,
The special effect execution means is
A first special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that reduces the sound output below the predetermined volume in a first period, and a second special effect that reduces the sound output below the predetermined volume during a second period that is longer than the first period. It is possible to perform a production (for example, a blackout production),
The second special performance is executed before the specific performance is executed (see Figure 11-5).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the period during which a predetermined image is made difficult to see due to the special effect and the output of sound and light is suppressed may be short or long, thereby creating a sense of expectation that the control will be in an advantageous state. can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2-5 is the gaming machine described in Form 2-4,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different depending on when the first special effect is executed and when the second special effect is executed (for example, the rate at which the blackout effect is executed is higher in super reach β1 and β2) , the expectation of a jackpot is higher than Super Reach α1 and α2, which have a shutter effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the period during which the output of sound and light is suppressed.

The gaming machine of Form 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-5,
The plurality of types of specific images include at least a first specific image and a second specific image having a similar aspect to the first specific image (for example, a small image, a medium image, and a large image. FIG. 11-13 (I) (See ~(L))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, one specific image changes due to the switching display, so that the presentation effect is improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-6,
The special notification performance execution means is capable of changing the display mode of at least one of the one specific image and the other specific image in multiple stages,
A start stage image (for example, a blank image 175SG010) to be displayed at the start stage among the plurality of stages, an end stage image (for example, a large image of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003) to be displayed at the end stage, and the start stage and the including an intermediate stage image (for example, a small image and a medium image of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003) when displayed at an intermediate stage of the end stage,
The display mode of the start stage image and the end stage image is different from the display mode of the intermediate stage image (for example, the blank image 175SG010 and the large images of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 are displayed in blue, and each character image 175SG001 ～Small and medium images of 175SG003 are displayed in gold)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easy to understand changes in a specific image and switching types.

The gaming machine of Form 2-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-7,
The execution period of the first specific effect is shorter than the execution period of the second specific effect (for example, the execution periods te3 and te4 of super reach effects C and D corresponding to super reach β1 and β2 are shorter than the execution period of the second specific effect) The execution periods te1 and te2 of super reach effects A and B corresponding to reach α1 and α2 are set longer (te1=te2<te3=te4))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the first specific performance from becoming redundant even though the special notification performance has not been executed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be executed repeatedly until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 using a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 239SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 239SG in this embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 10-1 to 10-38. In addition, in the explanation of each step of the flowchart in this feature section 239SG, for example, the part written as "Step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "239SGS1", and "Normal reach" is referred to as "N reach" or "Super reach". is sometimes abbreviated as "SP reach". In addition, configurations that are similar to those of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic explanation or have different shapes, arrangement positions, etc. but have similar functions will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted. In addition, in the following, the front side of FIG. 10-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the pachinko game machine 1 when viewed from the front side. The explanation will be based on the direction. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1.

In the display area of the image display device 5, a first pending storage display area 239SG005D and a second pending storage display area 239SG005U are arranged. In the first pending memory display area 239SG005D and the second pending memory display area 239SG005U, a pending memory display that specifiably displays the variable display pending number (special figure pending memory number) corresponding to each special symbol is performed. Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol means that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) occurs based on the starting winnings. In other words, the starting conditions (also referred to as "execution conditions") for executing the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols have been met, but the variable display based on the previously established starting condition is currently being executed, or the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot game state, and when the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display is not established, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. The pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 239SG005D is a pending memory display that is generated based on the starting prize when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening, and is the pending memory display in the second pending memory display area 239SG005U. The pending memory display is a pending memory display generated based on a starting prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening.

In this characteristic section 239SG, a round white display (displayed in the first pending memory display area 239SG005D) indicates a pending memory display generated based on a starting prize caused by a game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening. The pending memory display generated based on the starting winnings caused by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening is displayed as a round white display (displayed in the second pending memory display area 239SG005U). (reserved memory display). In addition, the pending memory display that occurred based on the starting winnings caused by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and the starting winnings caused by the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The display mode of the pending storage display that has occurred may be different from the display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, the number of special symbol pending memories is displayed in the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the first pending memory display area 239SG005D and the second pending memory display area 239SG005U. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided for displaying identifiably. The first reservation display 25A specifiably displays the number of stored first special symbols. The second reservation display 25B specifiably displays the second special figure reservation storage number. The first special figure pending storage number is the number of memories in which execution of variable display using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure pending storage number is the number of memories in which execution of variable display using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display pending memory number, which is the sum of the first special figure pending memory number and the second special figure pending memory number, is particularly also referred to as the total pending memory number. When we simply say "number of reserved special symbols", it usually refers to a concept that includes the first number of reserved special symbols, the second number of reserved special symbols, and the total number of reserved memories, but in particular, some of these (e.g. It may also refer to a concept that includes the first special figure pending memory number and the second special figure pending memory number, but excludes the total pending memory number.

A special variable winning ball unit 239SG007 in which a first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A and a second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B are integrated is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B.

Here, the configuration of the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007 will be explained. The following description will be made with reference to the up, down, left and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007, the left side constitutes the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A, and the right side constitutes the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B. In addition, a cover body (not shown) made of a transparent synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007, and the player can access the special variable winning ball unit through the cover body. The game balls flowing down inside 239SG007, especially inside the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, can be visually recognized.

The first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A is equipped with a first big winning slot door 239SG701 that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 239SG082 (see Figure 10-2), and can be switched between an open state and a closed state by the first big winning slot door 239SG701. Forming the first changing prize opening. The first big prize opening is formed to open upward on the left side of the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007. In addition, the first big winning opening door 239SG701 can be slid in the front and back direction between the closed position where the first winning opening is closed and the open position where the first winning opening is opened by driving the solenoid 239SG082. ing.

In the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A, when the solenoid 239SG082 is in the on state, the first big winning hole door 239SG701 opens the first big winning hole, and the game ball passes (enters) the first big winning hole. Make it easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 239SG082 is in the OFF state, the first big winning opening door 239SG701 closes the first big winning opening, making it impossible for the game ball to pass through (enter) the first big winning opening. In this way, the first grand prize opening changes into an open state where game balls can easily pass through (enter), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state where game balls cannot pass through (enter), which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition to the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the first grand prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state is provided in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to pass through (enter) the first grand prize opening. It's okay.

The game ball that has passed through (entered) the first big prize opening is detected by the first count switch 239SG023 (see Figure 10-2) provided in the first big prize opening. be done. The game ball that has passed through the first count switch 239SG023 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Based on the detection of game balls by the first count switch 239SG023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the first big winning hole that is in the open state in the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A, other winning holes such as the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole are opened. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the first big winning hole in the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A is in the open state, the game ball can enter the first big winning hole, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the first grand prize opening is closed in the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A, it is impossible or difficult to get the prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the first big winning opening. This results in a second state that is disadvantageous for the player.

In addition, most of the game balls that flow down without entering the first grand prize opening are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B by obstacle nails etc. not shown, and if the variable winning ball device 6B is in the expanded open state, the second start is started. You can enter the prize in the prize opening.

The second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B is formed to protrude upward from the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A, and has a second big winning opening that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 239SG083 (see Figure 10-2). A door 239SG711 is provided, and a second big winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state is formed by the second big winning opening door 239SG711. The second big winning hole is formed to open upward at the upper end of the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B. The second grand prize opening door 239SG711 operates between a first state (open state) in which the second grand prize opening is opened by driving the solenoid 239SG083 and a second state (closed state) in which the second grand prize opening is closed. It is provided so that it can be slid in the front and rear directions.

In the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, when the solenoid 239SG083 for the second big winning hole door 239SG711 is in the on state, the second big winning hole door 239SG711 opens the second big winning hole, and the game ball Make it easier to pass (enter) the two major prize openings. On the other hand, when the solenoid 239SG083 for the second grand prize opening door 239SG711 is in the off state, the second grand prize opening door 239SG711 closes the second grand prize opening, and the game ball passes through the second grand prize opening. Make it impossible to enter. In this way, the second grand prize opening changes into an open state where game balls can easily pass through (enter) and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state where game balls cannot pass through (enter) and is disadvantageous for the player. In addition to the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the second grand prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through (enter) the second grand prize opening is provided. It's okay.

The game ball passing through (entering) the second big prize opening is detected by the second count switch 239SG024A by passing through the second count switch 239SG024A installed in the second big winning opening. Based on the detection of game balls by the second count switch 239SG024A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the second grand prize opening that is in the open state in the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, other ordinary winning holes such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are opened. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) the mouth. Therefore, when the second big winning hole in the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second big winning hole, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the second grand prize opening is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, it is impossible or difficult to get the prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the second grand prize opening. This results in a second state that is disadvantageous for the player.

In addition, a game ball flow path is formed in the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, through which the game ball that has passed through the second big winning opening can flow down. A third count switch 239SG024B that can further detect the game balls that have passed through the second count switch 239SG024A is installed in the game ball flow path. The game ball that has passed through the third count switch 239SG024B is guided to the back side of the game board 2 via a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. In addition, the game ball that has reached the most downstream part of the branching path 741 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2, and passes through the fourth count switch 24C. , is detected by the fourth count switch 24C.

In addition, in this characteristic part 239SG, based on the fact that a game ball is detected by the third count switch 239SG024B during the small winning game which will be described later, the gaming state after the small winning game ends is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. There is.

In addition, the passage gate 41 in this characteristic part 239SG is installed between the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B in the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007.

In this feature section 239SG, the game area is divided into a left game area on the left side of a center decorative frame surrounding the image display device 5 disposed at a substantially central position of the game area, and a right game area on the right side. A game ball that is hit weakly with the batting operation handle (hitting to the left) will flow down the left gaming area, and a gaming ball that is hit strongly (hitting to the right) using the batting operation handle will flow down the right gaming area. ing.

In addition, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area can win prizes in the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area can win in the variable winning ball device 6B and the first special variable winning ball device. A large number of obstacle nails are arranged so that 239SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B can win and pass through the passage gate 41. In other words, in the case of left-handed hitting, the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B cannot win and cannot pass through the passage gate 41.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 will be schematically explained.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a variable display of normal symbols is displayed on the normal symbol display 20, such as when a game ball that has passed through a passage gate 41 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 10-2. After the normal pattern start condition for execution is satisfied, the normal pattern start condition is established for starting the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the completion of the previous variable display of the normal pattern. Variable display of common symbols by the symbol display device 20 is started.

In this variable display of ordinary symbols, after a predetermined period of time, which is the variable display time of ordinary symbols, has elapsed after the fluctuation of the ordinary symbols has started, the fixed ordinary symbols that are the variable display result of the ordinary symbols are stopped and displayed (derivative display). . At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed regular symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol will be changed to "miss the regular symbol". Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol becoming "normal symbol hit", enlargement opening control (tilting control) is performed in which the movable wing pieces of the electric tulip constituting the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilting position. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position.

After the first starting condition is established due to the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 10-2, For example, based on the first start condition being satisfied due to the completion of the previous special symbol game or jackpot game state, variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. In addition, the second starting condition is established when the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting prize opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 10-2. After that, the second special symbol display device 4B starts variable display of the special symbol based on the second start condition being satisfied, for example, due to the variable display of the previous special symbol or the end of the jackpot game state. .

In the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, when the variable display time as the special symbol variable display time has elapsed, the special symbol A fixed special symbol (variable display result) that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "jackpot" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small win symbol) different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, it becomes a "small win" as a predetermined display result. Moreover, if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol or the small prize symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "miss".

After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as a specific game state in which rounds (also referred to as "round games") that are advantageous to the player are executed a predetermined number of times. Ru. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "small win", it is controlled to a small win game state as a special game state different from the jackpot game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 239SG, as an example, special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" are used as jackpot symbols, and special symbols showing the number "2" are used as small winning symbols. , a special symbol showing a "-" symbol is a missed symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, and a losing symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is a special symbol different from each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The common special symbol may be a jackpot symbol, a small win symbol, or a loss symbol in the variable display of both special symbols.

After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes a "jackpot" as a specific display result, in the jackpot game state, the first big prize opening door of the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A 230SG701 opens the first grand prize opening until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) passes or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is executed in which the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A is placed in the first state (open state) that is advantageous for the player.

The round, which is the opening cycle of the first big prize opening, can be executed repeatedly until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" or "10"). Furthermore, even before the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round is terminated when a predetermined condition is met (for example, the game ball does not enter the first prize opening). Good too.

In addition, after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes a "small winning" as a specific display result, in the small winning gaming state, the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B The second grand prize opening door 239SG711 opens the second grand prize opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) passes or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. state. As a result, the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B enters the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in this feature part 239SG, the second big prize opening door 239SG711 is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) passes in the small winning game state, but the present invention does not solve this problem. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be opened multiple times in the small winning game state.

In the small winning game state, when the game ball that has entered the second big winning slot passes through the third count switch 239SG024B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, the game ball passes through the third count switch 239SG024B. It will be a “jackpot” based on (V winning jackpot). That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to a jackpot gaming state based on detecting passage of the third count switch 239SG024B of the game ball.

In addition, in this characteristic part 239SG, the game ball that won the second grand prize opening always passes through the third count switch 239SG024B. In other words, when a game ball enters the second big prize opening in the small winning game state, the winning game ball is always detected by the third count switch 239SG024B, and after the small winning game ends, the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state. be done. In addition, in this feature section 239SG, when the variable display result becomes a small win, the game ball enters the second big prize opening during the small win game, so that the control is always changed to the jackpot game state after the small win game ends. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the passing of the third count switch 239SG024B of the game ball, the second big winning opening door 239SG711 of the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B is opened for a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). ) or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the second grand prize opening is kept open. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B is placed in the first state (open state) that is advantageous to the player. In addition, in this characteristic part 239SG, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on passage of the third count switch 239SG024B, the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B is controlled to the first state, The present invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A may be controlled to the first state.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big prize opening, can be executed repeatedly until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "9", etc.). Furthermore, even before the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit, the round game may end due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not enter the second grand prize opening). good.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state in this feature section 239SG, a time saving state in which time saving control is performed within a predetermined variable display number range (for example, 99 times, 7 times, 3 times, 1 time) or a normal state in which time-saving control is not performed. By performing the time saving control, the variable display time in the variable display of the special figure (special figure variable display time) is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal gaming state that is different from a specific gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, and is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, initialization processing is performed after the power is turned on). The same control is performed as in the state in which the The time saving control is such that after the end of the jackpot game state, a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times, the variable display result becomes "jackpot", and in the small win game state, the game ball moves the third count switch 239SG024B. It is only necessary to terminate when one of the conditions of passing is satisfied first.

When the time saving control is performed, the variable display time (special symbol variable display time) in the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is controlled to be shorter than in the normal state. , control to shorten the variable display time of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol variable display time) by the ordinary symbol display 20 than in the normal state, and to control the variable display result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol each time to be "normal". Control to improve the probability of winning a figure than in the normal state, and tilting control time for controlling the tilting of the movable wing in the variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being a “normal figure winning” The second starting condition can be established by making it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second starting prize opening, such as making the ball longer than in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control is performed that is advantageous to the player by increasing the performance. In this way, the control that is advantageous for the player by making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening due to the time saving control is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all of them) may be performed in combination.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second starting winning hole is in the enlarged opening state is increased more than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and variable display of the special symbol can be executed frequently. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" or "small win" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed. A gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

FIG. 10-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 239SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-3(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variable display time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in Figure 10-3 (B), the result of determining whether the variable display result is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit" (predetermined result) ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be used when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-3(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small win" and the small win type is "small win A." Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small win" and the small win type is "small win B."

In addition, in this characteristic part 239SG, by providing a fifth variable display result designation command and a sixth variable display result designation command, the CPU 103 notifies the production control CPU 120 of the small winning type in advance before the start of the variable display. Although possible forms are illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a variable display result designation command, the CPU 103 indicates to the production control CPU 120 that the variable display result is a "small win". It may also be possible to notify only this in advance before the start of variable display.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stop (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative symbols in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(C), as a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed. Command 9501H is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure once after the end of the jackpot A jackpot game. Command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the end of the jackpot B jackpot game. Command 9503H is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure 99 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C. Command 9504H is a fifth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure seven times after the end of the jackpot D jackpot game. Command 9505H is a sixth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure 99 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Command A1XXH is a big winning opening notifying command that notifies that the big winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds to be executed (for example, "1" to "10") in the jackpot game state or the small win game state. be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the first pending memory display area 239SG005D etc. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the second pending memory display area 239SG005U or the like. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that designates the winning determination result at the time of starting winning.

The command D100H is a V winning notification designation command that notifies that the game ball has won a V prize, that is, the third count switch 239SG024B has been turned on because the game ball has passed through the third count switch 239SG024B. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special symbol time saving number notification command that notifies the remaining time saving control number of times of the second special symbol in the time saving state. The command D3XX is a prize ball number notification command for notifying the number of prize balls generated (awarded) when the game ball enters the winning hole.

FIG. 10-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-4, in this feature section 239SG, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random number MR2 for determining the variation pattern. Numerical data representing each of a numerical value MR3, a random numerical value MR4 for determining the general figure display result, and a random numerical value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

FIG. 10-5 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 239SG. In this feature section 239SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit", the variable display result is a "small win", etc. In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "small win" is referred to as a small win variation pattern.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-5(A) and 10-5(B), in this feature section 239SG, a plurality of different variation patterns are provided in advance according to the special symbol to be variable displayed.

As shown in Figure 10-5 (A), as the variation patterns of the first special symbol, the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, the super reach α, and the super reach variation pattern. There is a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as β is executed. In addition, although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in this feature section 239SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, etc. may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), among the variation patterns of the first special symbol in this feature section 239SG, the special symbol variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is executed, the super reach variation It is set shorter than the patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β. In addition, regarding the special figure variable display time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in this feature section 239SG is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed. The special figure variable display time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 239SG, as mentioned above, the expected degree of jackpot where the variable display result is "jackpot" is set high in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation In a pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-5(B), the variation pattern of the second special symbol in this feature section 239SG is a non-reach variation having a special symbol variable display time different from the variation pattern of the first special symbol. A pattern and a reach variation pattern are provided.

In addition, in this feature section 239SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. Then, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and the random number MR3 for determining the type of variation may be provided. The type of variation pattern may be determined first from the random value of , and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from among the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. 10-6, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A fluctuation pattern table and the like storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored.

The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include, for example, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6(A), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 10-6(B), and the table shown in FIG. 10-6(B). In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in C) and the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. (not shown), a deviation variation pattern determination table (not shown), a regular figure display result determination table (not shown), a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 10-6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (the value set by the CPU 103 when executing the special symbol normal processing as a value for specifying the special symbol to perform variable display) is 1 (first), that is, Regarding the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display and the case where the variable display special symbol designation buffer is 2 (second), that is, the case where the second special symbol is subject to variable display. , a determination value for determining a jackpot, and a determination value for determining a small win are set.

As shown in Figure 10-6 (A), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not set. Therefore, if the first special symbol is subject to variable display, only a jackpot can be won, and a small win will not be won.

In addition, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable display special figure specification buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot, and the second Even when the special symbol is subject to variable display, a jackpot will occur with the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and approximately 1/7 of these judgment values will be small. By setting the judgment value corresponding to a hit, if the second special symbol is subject to variable display, the probability (ratio) of winning a small hit is approximately 1/7. There is.

That is, when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in FIG. 10-6(A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot A to jackpot C). Furthermore, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit shown in FIG. 10-6(A), it is determined that the special symbol will be a small hit. Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 10-6(A) indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit and the probability (proportion) of a small win. In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to use the jackpot symbol. Also, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to control the small win game state or not, but whether to make the stop symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B a small win symbol or not. It also means deciding whether or not to do so.

In addition, in this feature section 239SG, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6(A) to determine whether it is a jackpot or a small win. A separate small hit determination table is provided, and a common table is used to determine the jackpot regardless of the variable display special symbol designation buffer, whether the first special symbol is variable display or the second special symbol is variable display. The small hit determination may be performed using a separate table only when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the second one.

In addition, in this feature section 239SG, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, no judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is Although it was designed to prevent winning, a portion of the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the jackpot may be set as the determination value corresponding to the small win, so that the small win may be won.

FIGS. 10-6(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Among these, in Figure 10-6 (B), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when Further, in FIG. 10-6(C), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table determines whether the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a jackpot symbol. This is the table that is referenced to determine the In addition, in this feature section 239SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-6(B) and (C), two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, are provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). On the other hand, only one type of jackpot, jackpot C, is provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol). In other words, the jackpot that occurs when a variable display of the first special symbol is performed is one of two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while when a variable display of the second special symbol is performed. The only jackpot that occurs is jackpot C.

FIG. 10-6(D) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table changes the type of small hit to small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a small win symbol. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In addition, in this characteristic part 239SG, if the game ball passes the third count switch 239SG024B during a small winning game of small winning A, that is, if a V winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type D is executed. If the game ball passes through the third count switch 239SG024B during a small winning game of small winning B, that is, if a V winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game with the jackpot type of jackpot E is executed. It is supposed to be done. In other words, these jackpot D and jackpot E are not the jackpot type determined by the random number MR2 for determining the hit type extracted at the time of starting winning, but are played during the game of either small win A or small win B. This is the jackpot type determined by passing the third count switch 239SG024B.

Here, to explain the jackpot type in this characteristic section 239SG using FIG. 10-6(E), in this characteristic section 239SG, as a jackpot type, jackpot A in which time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state ~Jackpot E is set.

Among these jackpots A to jackpot E, jackpot A is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot A, one time-saving control is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot B is a jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of jackpot B ends, the jackpot will be hit again until three special pattern games are executed for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until three special pattern games are executed. Time saving control is executed until this occurs.

Jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot C, the jackpot will be played again until the 99th special pattern game is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the 99th special pattern game is executed. Time saving control is executed until this occurs.

Jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) in which the second jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of jackpot D ends, the jackpot will be hit again until the 7th special pattern game is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the 7th special pattern game is executed. Time saving control is executed until this occurs.

The jackpot E is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) in which the second jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of jackpot E ends, the jackpot will be played again until the 99th special pattern game is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the 99th special pattern game is executed. Time saving control is executed until this occurs.

In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of a "normal hit" increases, making it easier for a small hit to occur than in a normal state. Therefore, in the time saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the end of the time saving state, there are cases where a jackpot occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and cases where the game ball hits a small hit during the game. Since a jackpot may occur by winning a V prize in a game, a so-called consecutive game state occurs in which a jackpot game state tends to occur continuously.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to one, so the variable display of the second special symbol for that one occasion, and the variable display of the second special symbol for that one occasion. The rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four retention memories that occur during the variable display of the second special symbol (the percentage of the variable display result of the above five times in total) 2) The sum of the percentage of jackpots occurring in the variable display of special symbols and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V is set to about 54%.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to three, so the variable display of the second special symbol for the three times and the three times The rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four retention memories that occur during the variable display of the second special symbol (the percentage of the total of 7 times above) 2) The sum of the percentage of jackpots occurring in the variable display of special symbols and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V is set to about 66%.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to 7, so the variable display of the second special symbol for the 7 times and the 7 times The rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four retention memories that occur during the variable display of the second special symbol (the percentage of the above total of 11 times) 2) The sum of the percentage of jackpots occurring in the variable display of special symbols and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V is set to about 82%.

In the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot games of jackpot C and jackpot E, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control is executed is set to 99, so the variable display of the second special symbol for the 99 times, The rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in any of the maximum 4 variable displays of the 2nd special symbol based on the retained memory that occur during the variable display of the 2nd special symbol 99 times (total of 103 The sum of the percentage of jackpots occurring in the variable display of the second special symbol of the game and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V is set to approximately 100%.

In addition, in this feature section 239SG, five types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot E, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided, Moreover, four or less types may be provided.

The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and selects a fluctuation pattern among the aforementioned multiple types according to the predetermined result. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination table includes a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot, which is used when it is predetermined to make a variable display result a "jackpot", and a fluctuation pattern determination table for making a variable display result a "small hit". A fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot, which is used when the variable display result is predetermined, and a fluctuation pattern determination table for a loss, which is used when it is predetermined that the variable display result will be a "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In particular, the variable pattern determination table for jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol is a variable pattern determination table that is selected when the gaming state is normal, and includes a normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), For each of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach α jackpot (PB1-2) and Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined randomness is determined within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. A jackpot variation pattern determination table A is provided in which numerical values are assigned as determination values. In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern judgment table A, these judgment values indicate that when the type of jackpot is "Jackpot B", the super reach β is easily determined, and when the type of jackpot is "Jackpot A", it is easy to determine the super reach β. is assigned in such a way that the super reach α is easily determined, thereby increasing the player's expectation that the “jackpot B” will be achieved when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed. .

Furthermore, the variable pattern determination table for jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol is a variable pattern determination table selected when the gaming state is a time saving state, and is a variable pattern determination table for non-reach jackpot (PB1-4). ), there is provided a jackpot variation pattern determination table B in which all random numbers within the possible range of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are assigned as determination values.

In addition, the loss variation pattern determination table based on the variable display of the first special symbol includes a loss variation that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of pending memories of the first special symbol is one or less. A pattern determination table A, a variation pattern determination table B for losing which is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of reserved storage of the first special symbol is 3 or more, and when the gaming state is the time saving state. A variation pattern determination table C for failure that is selected is prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, there are variation patterns for non-reach misses without shortening (PA1-1), variation patterns for normal reach misses (PA2-1), variation patterns for super reach α misses (PA2-2), and super reach α miss variations patterns (PA2-2). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value for the variation pattern (PA2-3) with the reach β out of range within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table B for a miss, there is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol being 3 or more, a normal reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and a normal reach variation pattern (PA1-2). PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern with a deviation of super reach α (PA2-2), and the fluctuation pattern with a deviation of super reach β (PA2-3). A numerical value is assigned as a judgment value. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table C for variation, all of the ranges that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the time saving control are A random value is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), the variation time is shorter in the non-reach out variation pattern (PA1-2) than in the non-reach out variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, by determining a non-reach variation pattern with a short fluctuation time, the retained memories are more easily digested, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By making a starting win when you are in a position, you will be less likely to receive a wasteful starting winning that is not stored in your memory, and if the number of held memories decreases, the fluctuation time will be long. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, thereby making it possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the variable display not being executed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-5(A), the shortened non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-3) selected during time saving control has a higher fluctuation than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2). Time is short. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the time saving control, the variable time is shorter than when the time saving control is not executed (when the gaming state is the normal state). Since the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PA1-3), it is possible to prevent a decrease in game interest due to the variable display of the second special symbol not being started during the time saving control.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10-2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source is discharged and the backup power source is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as the special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 239SG150 as shown in FIG. It is being The game control data holding area 239SG150 shown in FIG. 10-7 includes a first special symbol reservation storage section 239SG151A, a second special symbol reservation storage section 239SG151B, a regular symbol reservation storage section 239SG151C, and a game control flag setting section 239SG152. , a game control timer setting section 239SG153, a game control counter setting section 239SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 239SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passage (approach) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for variable display result determination, a random number MR2 for winning type determination, a random number MR3 for fluctuating pattern determination, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section 239SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for variable display result determination, a random number MR2 for winning type determination, a random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage section 239SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern holding storage section 239SG151C stores the holding information of the normal pattern game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the standard figure reservation storage unit 239SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the standard figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 239SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section 239SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 239SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 239SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 239SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 239SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section 239SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 239SG154, numerical data indicating random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, random numbers MR1 to MR4, is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 239SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section 239SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 10-2 stores various data tables used to control performance operations in addition to programs for performance control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

The special pattern variable display performance control pattern corresponds to multiple types of variation patterns, and corresponds to the period from when the special pattern starts changing in the special pattern game until the finalized special pattern that becomes the special pattern display result is derived and displayed. From data indicating the control contents of various performance operations, such as variable display operation of decorative symbols, reach performance, re-lottery performance, etc., or various performance display operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols. It is configured. The preview performance control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of a performance operation that is a preview performance that is executed in response to a plurality of preview patterns prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1.

The special figure variable display performance control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of ready-to-win performance control patterns in which the performance mode in each ready-to-win performance is different for each variable pattern for executing the ready-to-win performance.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 10-2 has an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation, for example, for effect control as shown in FIG. 10-8(A). A data holding area 239SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 239SG190 shown in FIG. 10-8(A) includes a production control flag setting section 239SG191, a production control timer setting section 239SG192, a production control counter setting section 239SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 239SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 239SG191 has multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 239SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 239SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 239SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 239SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting section 239SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 239SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting section 239SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 239SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 239SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-8(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 239SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command and the number of pending memories. Three commands called notification commands (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) are sent as one set from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 239SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, and pending storage number notification commands. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing them in association with each other and storing them separately into a first special figure pending memory and a second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 239SG194A of this feature section 239SG, there is a variable display corresponding panel to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the second special figure variable display compatible panel display production process (FIG. 10-25), which will be described later. The storage area for setting the panel pattern determined flag indicating that the pattern (panel pattern) of the panel corresponding to the second special figure pending memory has already been determined is the buffer number "2-0" of the second special figure pending memory. ” to “2-4”.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 239SG194A when a starting winning is made to the first starting winning opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 239SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 239SG194A shown in FIG. 10-8(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 10-8(B), when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the first special pattern pending memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in this feature section 239SG, when the production control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it is determined whether or not the start prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the pending storage number notification command are received, and these If commands have been received, these commands may be stored at the beginning of the free area of the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A as a pending memory of each special symbol.

Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 239SG will be explained. FIG. 10-9 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (239SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (239SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (239SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 239SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 239SGS102 (239SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 239SG155 is set to "1" (239SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 239SGS101 (239SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in 239SGS102 (239SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (239SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (239SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (239SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 239SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 239SGS105 (239SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 239SG155 is set to "2" (S106) .

After executing either of the processes of 239SGS103 and 239SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (239SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (239SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 239SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 239SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the winning type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section 239SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (239SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (239SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 239SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 239SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the hit type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a “big hit” or “small hit”. is used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 239SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 239SGS110, transmission settings for a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (239SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the processing of 239SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random value determination process (239SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. (239SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 239SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (239SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (Y in 239SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (239SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N at 239SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (239SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 10-10(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 239SGS 112 in FIG. 10-9 as the winning random value determination process. In this characteristic section 239SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 6) is performed to determine the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as a "jackpot". A determination is made as to whether or not to control to a gaming state or to control to a small winning gaming state as a "small winning". Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 6, FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value determination process of S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole). Accordingly, it is determined whether or not it is determined that a jackpot symbol or a small prize symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is determined whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "big hit" or "small win", and based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 or the like executes the panel display performance as described later. become.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 10-10, the CPU 103 first selects and sets the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6(A) (239SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted at 239SGS109 in FIG. 10-9 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (239SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of the 239SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 calculates the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by performing a point-by-point comparison. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined at 239SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot during variable display (239SGS123;N), it is determined whether the starting opening buffer value is 1 or not. (239SGS124). When the starting opening buffer value is 2 (239SGS124; N), the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted at 239SGS109 in Figure 10-9 is added to the predetermined small hit determination range. It is determined whether or not it is within (239SGS125).

If the starting opening buffer value is 1 in 239SGS124 (239SGS124; Y) or if the random value MR1 is not within the small hit determination range in 1239SGS125 (239SGS125; N), set the transmission of the symbol designation command according to the miss. Then, the winning random value determination process ends (239SGS126).

Further, when the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range in 239SGS125 (239SGS125; Y), the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the small hit is performed and the winning random number value determination process is ended (239SGS127).

If the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in 239SGS123 (239SGS123; Y), the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot is performed and the winning random number value determination process is ended (239SGS128). The symbol designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. .

FIG. 10-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 10-11, the CPU 103 first determines whether the target for setting the variation pattern is the first special symbol (239SGS131). Whether or not the target for setting the variation pattern is the first special figure may be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1".

Then, if the target for setting the fluctuation pattern is the first special figure (239SGS131; Y), the fluctuation pattern judgment table according to the variable display result (whether or not the jackpot flag or small win flag is set) and the gaming state is set. Select (239SGS132).

Specifically, as mentioned above, the selectable variation pattern determination table is used when the gaming state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot (when the time saving flag is not set and the jackpot flag is set). The jackpot variable pattern determination table A is selected when the gaming state is a time-saving state and the variable display result is a jackpot (when the time-saving flag and the jackpot flag are set). Variation pattern determination table B, when the gaming state is normal, the variable display result is off (time saving flag and jackpot flag are not set), and the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is 1 or less Variable pattern determination table A for loss selected in , the gaming state is normal, the variable display result is loss (time saving flag and jackpot flag are not set), and the number of pending memories of the first special symbol is 3. Variation pattern determination table B for losing, which is selected when the number of winnings is greater than or equal to A pattern determination table C is prepared. Note that these fluctuation pattern determination tables may be such that all values of the random number value MR3 are assigned to one fluctuation pattern, so that only one fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined, Any one of the plurality of variation patterns may be determined by assigning the range value of the random number value MR3 to the plurality of variation patterns without overlapping.

Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number value of MR3 stored in association with the reservation number "1" in the first special figure reservation storage section 239SG151A, and uses the read random number value in the fluctuation pattern determination table selected by the 239SGS132. After determining the associated variation pattern as the variation pattern to be set (239SGS133), the process advances to 239SGS149. That is, in the 239SGS 133, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the random value MR3 read from the reserved memory and the selected fluctuation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, if the target for setting the fluctuation pattern is not the first special figure, that is, if it is the second special figure (239SGS131;N), whether the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting section 239SG152 is on. By determining whether or not it is set (set), it is determined whether the gaming state is a time saving state in which time saving control is performed (239SGS135). If the time saving flag is not set (239SGS135; N), the process advances to 239SGS161 shown in Figure 10-12, and if the time saving flag is set (239SGS135; Y), 1 is added to the time saving state variable display counter. After updating (239SGS136), it is determined whether the second gaming state flag or the third gaming state flag is set (239SGS137).

In addition, the gaming state flags (first gaming state flag to sixth gaming state flag) are set in response to each gaming state designation command that the CPU 103 sets to send to the production control board 12 in the jackpot end process described later. It's a flag. In this feature section 239SG, the first gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission of the first gaming state designation command to the production control board in the jackpot end process, and the second gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the sending of the second gaming state designation command to the production control board in the jackpot end processing, and the third gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the production control board to send the second gaming state designation command in the jackpot ending processing. This is a flag indicating that the transmission setting of the third gaming state designation command has been made to the board, and the fourth gaming state flag is the flag that indicates that the CPU 103 transmits the fourth gaming state designation command to the production control board in the jackpot end processing. This is a flag indicating that the transmission settings have been made, and the fifth gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission of the fifth gaming state designation command to the production control board in the jackpot end process. , the sixth game state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission of the sixth game state designation command to the production control board in the jackpot end process.

In other words, the process of 239SGS137 determines whether or not the CPU 103 has set the sending of the second game state designation command or the third game state designation command to the production control board 12 at the end of the previous jackpot game. Is the time saving state controlled after the end of the game a time saving state in which one time saving control is performed after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, or a time saving state in which time saving control is performed three times after the end of the jackpot game of tail winning B? This is a process for determining whether or not the

If the second gaming state flag or the third gaming state flag is not set (239SGS137; N), proceed to 239SGS172 shown in FIG. 10-12, and if the second gaming state flag or the third gaming state flag is set, (239SGS137; Y), it is determined whether or not the time-saving state variable display number counter indicating the number of variable display times after being controlled to the time-saving state is 1 (239SGS138).

When the time saving state variable display count counter is 1, that is, in the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state (239SGS138; Y), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (239SGS139), and the jackpot is determined. If the flag is set (239SGS139; Y), the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to be the reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB3-3) with a special symbol fluctuation time of 50 seconds shown in Figure 10-5 (B). (239SGS140) and proceed to 239SGS149. Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (239SGS139; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is set (239SGS141). When the small hit flag is set (239SGS141; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3-3) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 50 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B) ) (239SGS142) and proceeds to 239SGS149. In addition, if the small hit flag is not set (239SGS141; N), the fluctuation pattern is shown in Figure 10-5 (B). The fluctuation pattern of out-of-reach with a special symbol fluctuation time of 50 seconds (PA3-5) (239SGS143) and proceeds to 239SGS149.

On the other hand, if the time saving state variable display count counter is not 1 (239SGS138; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (239SGS144), and if the jackpot flag is set (239SGS144; Y). The fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to be the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB3-1) in which the special symbol fluctuation time shown in FIG. 10-5(B) is 2 seconds (239SGS145), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (239SGS144; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is set (239SGS146). Then, when the small hit flag is set (239SGS146; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3- 1) is uniquely determined (239SGS147), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. In addition, when the small hit flag is not set (239SGS146; N), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach out fluctuation pattern (PA3-1) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 2 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B). ) (239SGS148) and proceeds to 239SGS149.

In addition, in 239SGS161, which moves when the judgment is "N" in 239SGS135 because the time saving flag is not set, either the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set at the end of the jackpot game. Determine whether or not there is.

Then, if either the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set, that is, after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A or jackpot B, the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state, and then the gaming state is changed to Furthermore, when the time saving state is controlled to the normal state (239SGS161; Y), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (239SGS162), and if the jackpot flag is set (239SGS162; Y), The fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to be the reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB3-2) in which the special symbol fluctuation time is 20 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-5(B) (239SGS163), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (239SGS162; N), it is determined whether the small win flag is set (239SGS164). Then, when the small hit flag is set (239SGS164; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3-2 ) (239SGS165) and proceeds to 239SGS149. In addition, if the small hit flag is not set (239SGS164; N), the fluctuation pattern is shown in Figure 10-5 (B) as a fluctuation pattern of out-of-reach with a special symbol fluctuation time of 20 seconds (PA3-4). (239SGS166) and proceeds to 239SGS149.

On the other hand, if neither the second game state flag nor the third game state flag is set, that is, after the game state is controlled to the time saving state after the end of any of the jackpot games from jackpot C to jackpot E, When the gaming state is further controlled from the time saving state to the normal state (239SGS161; N), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (239SGS167), and if the jackpot flag is set (239SGS167; Y). ), the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to be the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB3-1) in which the special symbol fluctuation time shown in FIG. 10-5(B) is 2 seconds (239SGS168), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (239SGS167; N), it is determined whether the small win flag is set (239SGS169). Then, when the small hit flag is set (239SGS169; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3- 1) (239SGS170) and proceeds to 239SGS149. In addition, when the small hit flag is not set (239SGS169;N), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach out fluctuation pattern (PA3-1) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 2 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B). ) (239SGS171) and proceeds to 239SGS149.

Also, if the time saving flag is set (239SGS135; Y), but neither the second gaming state flag nor the third gaming state flag is set, so that the determination is "N" in 239SGS137 (that is, In 239SGS172, which shifts to the time-saving state after the end of any jackpot game from jackpot C to jackpot E), whether or not the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter is one of 1 to 6. In other words, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed within six times after being controlled to the time saving state. If the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is any one of 1 to 6, 239SGS172; Y), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (239SGS173), and if the jackpot flag is set ( 239SGS173; Y), the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to the reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB3-2) with a special symbol fluctuation time of 20 seconds shown in Figure 10-5 (B) (239SGS174), and 239SGS149 move on. Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (239SGS173; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is set (239SGS175). When the small hit flag is set (239SGS175; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3-2) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 20 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B) ) (239SGS176) and proceeds to 239SGS149. In addition, when the small hit flag is not set (239SGS175; N), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach out fluctuation pattern (PA3-2) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 7 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B). ) (239SGS177) and proceeds to 239SGS149.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter is not one of 1 to 6, 239SGS172;N), and it is further determined whether the time-saving state variable display count counter is 7 (239SGS178). When the time saving state variable display count counter is 7 (239SGS178; Y), whether or not the fourth game state flag is set, that is, the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. It is determined whether or not (239SGS179).

If the fourth game status flag is not set (239SGS179; Y), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (239SGS180), and if the jackpot flag is set (239SGS180; Y), The fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to be the reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB3-2) in which the special symbol fluctuation time is 20 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-5(B) (239SGS181), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (239SGS180; N), it is determined whether the small win flag is set (239SGS182). When the small hit flag is set (239SGS182; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3-2) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 20 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B) ) (239SGS183) and proceeds to 239SGS149. In addition, if the small hit flag is not set (239SGS182; N), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the fluctuation pattern of a Lee off with a special symbol fluctuation time of 2 seconds 0 shown in Figure 10-5 (B) (PA3-4 ) (239SGS184) and proceeds to 239SGS149.

On the other hand, if the time saving state variable display count counter is not 7 (239SGS178; N), or if the fourth gaming state flag is set (239SGS179; N), whether the sixth gaming state flag is set or not. In other words, it is determined whether the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E (239SGS185).

If the sixth game status flag is not set (239SGS185; N), execute the processes of 239SGS173 to 239SGS177 described above to determine the fluctuation pattern as one of PB3-2, PC3-2, and PA3-2. If the sixth gaming state flag is set (239SGS185; Y), the process further proceeds to 239SGS149, and if the sixth game state flag is set (239SGS185; Y), it also determines whether the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is one of 8 to 10, that is. , it is determined whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol is being displayed for the 8th to 10th time after the time-saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E (239SGS186). If the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is any value from 8 to 10, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (239SGS187), and if the jackpot flag is set (239SGS187; For Y), the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to be the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB3-1) with a special symbol fluctuation time of 2 seconds shown in Figure 10-5 (B) (239SGS188), and proceed to 239SGS149. . Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (239SGS187; N), it is determined whether the small win flag is set (239SGS189). Then, when the small hit flag is set (239SGS189; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3- 1) is uniquely determined (239SGS190) and proceeds to 239SGS149. In addition, when the small hit flag is not set (239SGS189;N), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach out fluctuation pattern (PA3-1) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 2 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B). ) (239SGS191) and proceeds to 239SGS149.

Further, if the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is not one of the values from 8 to 10 (239SGS186;N), it is further determined whether the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is 11 ( 239SGS192), if the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is not 11, that is, if it is the 11th variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E (239SGS192;N), the above-mentioned 239SGS173 ~ Execute the processing of 239SGS177 to determine the fluctuation pattern as one of PB3-2, PC3-2, or PA3-2, and proceed to 239SGS149, and if the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is 11, 239SGS192; Y), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (239SGS193), and if the jackpot flag is set (239SGS193; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the special figure fluctuation shown in Figure 10-5 (B). The reach jackpot variation pattern (PB3-2) with a time of 20 seconds is uniquely determined (239SGS194), and the process proceeds to 239SGS149. Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (239SGS193; N), it is determined whether the small win flag is set (239SGS195). When the small hit flag is set (239SGS195; Y), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the reach small hit fluctuation pattern (PC3-2) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 20 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B) ) (239SGS196) and proceeds to 239SGS149. In addition, if the small hit flag is not set (239SGS195; N), the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA3-3) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 15 seconds as shown in Figure 10-5 (B). ) (239SGS197) and proceeds to 239SGS149.

In 239SGS149, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of special symbols so as to start one of the figure games. As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of 239SGS149, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of special symbols (239SGS150). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting section sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the 239SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 239SG155 is provided with setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The various commands for which transmission settings have been made are transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

After executing the process of 239SGS150, a special symbol variable display time which is a variable display time of a special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (239SGS151). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the period from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. The required time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (239SGS152), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the symbol determination period timer is operating (counting the timer) (239SGS201).

If the symbol confirmation period timer is in operation (239SGS201; Y), after decrementing the symbol confirmation period timer (described later) by 1 (239SGS213), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out (239SGS214). . If the symbol confirmation period timer has not timed out (239SGS214; N), the special symbol stop processing ends, while if the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out (239SGS214; Y), the stopped symbol is removed and the symbol (239SGS215), and if it is a missed symbol (239SGS215; Y), update the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing. (239SGS216), the special symbol stop processing ends.

Also, if the stopped symbol is not a winning symbol (239SGS215; N), it is determined whether the stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol (239SGS217), and if it is a jackpot symbol (239SGS217; Y), a special symbol is determined. After updating the value of the process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (239SGS218), the special symbol stop processing is ended. In addition to the process of 239SGS218, the setting of the jackpot display time timer and the process of setting the number of jackpot openings to the opening number counter may be executed.

In addition, if the stopped symbol is not a jackpot symbol (239SGS217; N), the stopped symbol is a small-hit symbol, so the value of the special pattern process flag is set to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit release pre-processing. After updating to (239SGS219), the special symbol stop processing ends. In addition to the process of 239SGS219, the setting of a small win display time timer and the process of setting the number of openings of a small winning in an opening number counter may be executed.

On the other hand, if the symbol confirmation period timer is not operating (239SGS201; N), the variation of the special symbol is ended, and the stop symbol is stopped displayed (derivated) on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. (also referred to as display) (239SGS202). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. Furthermore, the stop symbols are determined at the start of the variable display.

In addition, control is performed to send a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (239SGS203). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (239SGS204), and if the jackpot flag is not set (239SGS204;N), it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS204). 239SGS231), if the small hit flag is not set (239SGS231; N), it is further determined whether the time saving flag is set (239SGS246), and if the time saving flag is not set (239SGS246; N). ), after setting the symbol confirmation period timer to a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) (239SGS257), issue a gaming state specification command that specifies the normal state corresponding to the time saving flag not being set. And the setting for transmitting the remaining second special symbol time saving number notification command is performed (239SGS258), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is set (239SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 controls the game status flags (first game status flag to sixth game status flag) if the time saving flag is set. flag) (239SGS205), and the production control board 12 issues a hit start 1 designation command (jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (jackpot B), and a hit start 3 designation command according to the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. Make settings for sending (Jackpot C) (239SGS207).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (239SGS208). Then, a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) is set in the symbol determination period timer (239SGS209), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag is set (239SGS231; Y), the production control board 12 is sent the hit start 4 designation command (small win A) or the hit start 5 designation command (small win B) corresponding to the small win. ) (239SGS232). Then, it is determined whether the time saving flag is set (239SGS233).

If the time saving flag is not set (239SGS233; N), after setting the symbol confirmation period timer to a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) (239SGS240), check that the time saving flag is not set. Settings are made to transmit a gaming state designation command that designates the normal state corresponding to the normal state and a remaining second special symbol time reduction number notification command (239SGS241), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

In addition, if the time-saving flag is set (239SGS233; Y), after decrementing the total time-saving number counter by 1 (239SGS234), check whether the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" indicating the first special figure. It is determined whether or not (239SGS235). Then, if the variable special figure designation buffer is not "1" (239SGS235;N), that is, if the target of the stop display is the second special figure, the second special figure time saving number counter is decremented by 1 ( 239SGS236), 239SGS237, and if the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" (239SGS235; Y), that is, if the target of stop display is the first special figure, proceed to 239SGS237 without executing 239SGS236. move on.

In 239SGS237, it is determined whether the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special symbol time saving number counter is 0 or not. Then, if the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special symbol time saving number counter is not 0 (239SGS237; N), set the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) to the symbol confirmation period timer. After setting (239SGS240), settings are made to send a gaming state designation command that specifies the time-saving state corresponding to the time-saving flag being set, and a notification command for the remaining second special symbol time-saving number of times (239SGS241), and the special The symbol stop processing ends.

If the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special symbol time saving number counter is 0 (239SGS237; Y), the time saving flag is cleared (239SGS238), and the total time saving number counter and the second special symbol time saving number of times are cleared. After clearing the counter value (239SGS239), set the symbol confirmation period timer to a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) (239SGS240), and set the normal value corresponding to the time saving flag not being set by clearing. Settings are made to send a gaming state designation command that designates the state (239SGS241), and the special symbol stop processing is ended. In addition, in the process of 239SGS241 when the time saving flag is cleared, since the time saving flag is not set, it is not necessary to perform the setting for transmitting the second special symbol time saving number notification command.

On the other hand, if neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set, but the time-saving flag is set (239SGS246; Y), that is, if the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the time-saving state, the total time-saving number counter After -1 (239SGS249), it is determined whether the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" indicating the first special figure (239SGS248). Then, if the variable special figure designation buffer is not "1" (239SGS248;N), that is, if the target of the stop display is the second special figure, the second special figure time saving number counter is decremented by 1 ( 239SGS249), 239SGS250, and if the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" (239SGS248; Y), that is, if the target of stop display is the first special figure, proceed to 239SGS250 without executing 239SGS249. move on.

In the 239SGS 250, it is determined whether the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special symbol time saving number counter is 0 or not. Then, when the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special symbol time saving number counter is 0 (239SGS250; Y), the time saving flag is cleared (239SGS251), and the total time saving number counter and the second special symbol After clearing the value of the time saving number counter (239SGS252), set the value corresponding to the first period (10 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer (239SGS253), and set the normal value corresponding to the time saving flag not being set by clearing. Settings are made to send a gaming state designation command that designates the state (239SGS258), and the special symbol stop processing is ended. In addition, in the process of 239SGS258 when the time saving flag is cleared, since the time saving flag is not set, it is not necessary to perform the setting for transmitting the second special symbol time saving number notification command.

In addition, if the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special figure time saving number counter is not 0 (239SGS250;N), it is further determined whether the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is 7 or not. (239SGS254). If the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter is not 7 (239SGS254; N), the time-saving flag is set after setting the symbol confirmation period timer to a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) (239SGS257). Settings are made to send a gaming state designation command that specifies a time-saving state corresponding to the time-saving state corresponding to the time-saving state and a remaining second special symbol time-saving number notification command (239SGS258), and while the special symbol stop processing is finished, the time-saving state is variable. When the value of the display number counter is 7 (239SGS254; Y), it is determined whether the type of the previous jackpot game is jackpot E (239SGS255). It should be noted that whether or not the type of the previous jackpot game is jackpot E may be determined based on whether or not a jackpot 6 game state designation command is received from the main board 11 when the time saving state is controlled.

If the type of the previous jackpot game is jackpot E (239SGS255; Y), after setting the symbol confirmation period timer to a value corresponding to the first period (10 seconds), the time saving flag is set. Settings are made to transmit a gaming state designation command that specifies the corresponding time saving state and a remaining second special symbol time saving number notification command (239SGS258), and the special symbol stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if the type of the previous jackpot game is not jackpot E (239SGS255;N), the symbol confirmation period timer is set to a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds), and then the time saving flag is set. Settings are made to transmit a gaming state designation command that specifies a time saving state corresponding to the time saving state and a remaining second special symbol time saving number notification command (239SGS258), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

In this way, in this feature section 239SG, after the end of the jackpot game, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed for the number of times set in the second special symbol time saving number counter, or the number of times set in the total time saving number counter is executed. The time saving state is set to continue until the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the number of times is executed. For this reason, for example, when the time saving state is controlled in a state where the second special symbol holding memory does not exist, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed before the variable display of the second special symbol. This makes it possible to prevent the player from losing interest due to the player missing an opportunity to win a small prize as a result of the display.

In addition, in conventional pachinko gaming machines, when the last variable display in the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the variable display ends, but the pachinko gaming machine of this feature section 239SG 1, when the last variable display in the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (FIG. 10-23).

FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed at 118 in FIG. 5 as the small win release preprocess. In the small win release preprocessing, the CPU 103 first increments the small win display time timer by 1 (239SGS261), and determines whether the small win display time timer has timed out (239SGS262). If the small hit display time timer has not timed out (239SGS262; N), the pre-processing for opening the small win is finished, while if the small hit display time timer has timed out (239SGS262; Y), the second grand prize is won. A value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set to an open time timer for keeping the mouth open (239SGS263). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9" (239SGS264), which is the value corresponding to the process during the opening of the small hit (S119), and the pre-processing before opening the small hit is ended.

FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S119 of FIG. 6 as the process during opening of the small hit. (239SGS271). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the open time timer has timed out (239SGS272).

If the opening time timer has timed out (239SGS272; Y), the process moves to 239SGS285, and if the opening time timer has not timed out (239SGS272; N), it is determined whether it is the timing to open the second grand prize opening. (239SGS273). If it is the timing to open the second big winning hole, the CPU 103 controls the second big winning hole to open by driving the solenoid 239SG083 for the second big winning hole door 239SG711 (239SGS274). Then, the transmission setting of the big prize opening designation command corresponding to the round is performed (239SGS275), and the process moves to 239SGS276. Incidentally, the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open, which is set to be transmitted in the 239SGS275, is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above. If it is not the timing to open the second grand prize opening (239SGS273; N), the process moves to 239SGS276 without passing through 239SGS274 and 239SGS275.

At 239SGS276, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is time to close the second big prize opening (239SGS276). If it is the timing to close the second big winning opening (239SGS276; Y), the CPU 103 controls the second big winning opening to be closed by driving the solenoid 239SG083 for the second big winning opening door 239SG711 (239SGS277) . Then, the transmission setting of the specified command after the opening of the big winning hole according to the round is performed (239SGS278), and the process moves to 239SGS279. Incidentally, the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open, which has been set to be transmitted in 239SGS278, is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above. If it is not the closing timing of the second grand prize opening (239SGS276; N), the process moves to 239SGS279 without passing through 239SGS277 and 239SGS278.

At 239SGS279, the CPU 103 determines whether the third count switch 239SG024B is turned on (239SGS279). If the third count switch 239SG024B is not on (239SGS279; N), the small hit opening process is finished, and if the third count switch 239SG024B is on (239SGS279; Y), the third It is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the count switch 239SG024B is turned on, that is, that the game ball has passed through the third count switch 239SG024B, is set (239SGS280). If the V winning flag is set (239SGS280; Y), end the small win opening process, and if the V winning flag is not set (239SGS280; N), set the V winning flag (239SGS281). .

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a V winning prize notification command to the production control board 12 (239SGS282). Incidentally, the V winning prize notification command is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the above-mentioned command control process (S27). In addition, if the second big winning opening is in the open state, the CPU 103 controls the second big winning opening to be in the closed state by driving the solenoid 239SG083 for the second big winning opening door 239SG711 (239SGS283), and controls the opening time Clear the timer (239SGS284).

Then, in 239SGS285, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10" (239SGS285), which is the value corresponding to the small hit ending process (S120), and ends the small hit opening process.

FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S120 of FIG. 6 as the small hit ending process. In the small winning ending process, the CPU 103 determines whether the small winning end display timer is operating. It is determined whether or not (239SGS301). If the small hit end display timer is not operating (239SGS301; N), clear the small hit flag (239SGS302), and set the sending of a winning end designation command according to the small win to the production control board 12 (239SGS303) ). The winning end designation command is sent to the production control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above. Then, a value corresponding to the small hit end display time is set in the small hit end display timer (239SGS304), and the small hit end process is ended.

On the other hand, if the small hit end display timer is in operation (239SGS301; Y), the value of the small win end display timer is decreased by 1 (239SGS305). Then, it is determined whether the small hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small win end display timer has timed out (239SGS306). If the small hit end display time has not elapsed (239SGS306; N), the CPU 103 determines whether the third count switch 239SG024B is turned on (239SGS307). If the third count switch 239SG024B is not turned on (239SGS307; N), the small hit end process is finished, and if the third count switch 239SG024B is turned on (239SGS307; Y), the third count has already started. It is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the switch 239SG024B is turned on, that is, that the game ball has passed the third count switch 239SG024B, is set (239SGS308). If the V winning flag is set (239SGS308; Y), the small win ending process is ended, and if the V winning flag is not set (239SGS308; N), the V winning flag is set (239SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the production control board 12 (239SGS310), and ends the small winning ending process. Incidentally, the V winning prize notification command is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the above-mentioned command control process (S17).

Further, when the small winning end display time has elapsed in 239SGS306 (239SGS306; Y), the CPI 103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (239SGS311). If the V winning flag is gusseted (239SGS311; Y), the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag and sets the jackpot flag (239SGS312, 239SGS313). Then, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type from "jackpot D" and "jackpot E" based on the small win type in which the V winning occurred (239SGS314). As for the jackpot type, as shown in Figure 10-6 (D), if the small hit type in which the relevant V winning occurred is "small hit A", the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot D", and the corresponding If the small win type in which the V winning occurred is "small win B," the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot E." Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 239SG155 (239SGS315), the determined jackpot type is set. Store and proceed to 239SGS316.

After executing 239SGS315, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" (239SGS316), which is the value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (S114), and ends the small hit ending process.

In other words, in this feature section 239SG, the game ball passes through the third count switch 239SG024B not only during the small winning game but also during the period after the small winning game ends until the small winning end display time elapses. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the second big prize opening just before the end of the small hit game, the game ball will pass through the third count switch 239SG024B and the jackpot game will be executed after the small hit end process is completed. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, if the V winning flag is not set in 239SGS311 (239SGS311; N), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110). 239SGS317), the small hit end process is ended.

FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (239SGS321). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (239SGS321;N), set the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time). Set (239SGS322) and end the process.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (239SGS321; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (239SGS323). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (239SGS324). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (239SGS324; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is jackpot A (239SGS325). If the jackpot type is jackpot A (239SGS325; Y), set the second special symbol time saving number counter to "1" and set the total time saving number counter to "5" (239SGS326, 239SGS327), move on.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is not jackpot A (239SGS325; N), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot B (239SGS328). If the jackpot type is jackpot B (239SGS328; Y), set the second special symbol time saving number counter to "3" and set the total time saving number counter to "7" (239SGS329, 239SGS330), move on.

Further, if the jackpot type is not jackpot B (239SGS328; N), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot C (239SGS331). When the jackpot type is jackpot C (239SGS331; Y), set the second special symbol time saving number counter to "99" and set the total time saving number counter to "100" (239SGS332, 239SGS333), move on.

Furthermore, if the jackpot type is not jackpot C (239SGS321; N), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot D (239SGS334). If the jackpot type is jackpot D (239SGS334; Y), set the second special symbol time saving number counter to "7" and set the total time saving number counter to "11" (239SGS335, 239SGS336), move on.

Then, if the jackpot type is not jackpot D (239SGS334;N), the jackpot type is jackpot E, and the second special time saving number counter is set to "99", and the total time saving number counter is set to "100". Set (239SGS337, 239SGS338) and proceed to 239SGS339.

In 239SGS339, the CPU 103 performs transmission settings for a gaming state designation command according to the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game. In addition, in 239SGS339, the CPU 103 issues a second game state designation command if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot A, a third game state designation command if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot B, and a third game state designation command for the executed jackpot. If the jackpot type of the game is jackpot C, the fourth game state designation command is issued. If the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot D, the fifth game state specification command is issued. If the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot E, the command is issued. What is necessary is to execute the transmission setting of the sixth gaming state designation command. Further, the gaming state designation command set to be transmitted in 239SGS339 is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

After executing the process of 239SGS339, the CPU 103 sets the time saving state variable display count counter to "0" and ends the jackpot end process (239SGS340).

As the CPU 103 executes each process as described above, as shown in FIG. 10-18(A), after the jackpot game of jackpot A is finished, the second special symbol is first variably displayed once as a time saving state. It runs for 50 seconds. After the variable display ends, the time saving flag is cleared (the gaming state is controlled to the normal state) at the timing when the variable display ends, and the variable display continues for a first period (10 seconds) as a symbol confirmation period. will be stopped. After the first period has elapsed, the second special symbol is variablely displayed for 20 seconds up to four times while the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-18(B), after the jackpot game of jackpot B ends, first, variable display of the second special symbol is executed three times as a time saving state. The first variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed for 50 seconds, and the second and third variable display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 seconds. In addition, in the first and second variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds). In the third variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (the gaming state is controlled to the normal state), and the first period (10 seconds) is continued as the symbol confirmation period. variable display is stopped. After the first period has elapsed, the second special symbol is variablely displayed for 20 seconds up to four times while the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-19(A), after the jackpot game of jackpot C ends, first, variable display of the second special symbol is executed 99 times as a time saving state. The variable display of the second special symbol from the first to the 98th time in the time saving state is executed for 7 seconds, and the variable display of the second special symbol at the 99th time is executed for 20 seconds. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol from the first time to the 98th time, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds). In the 99th variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (the gaming state is controlled to the normal state), and the first period (10 seconds) is continued as the symbol confirmation period. variable display is stopped. After the first period has elapsed, the second special symbol is variablely displayed for 2 seconds up to four times while the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, first, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times as a time saving state. The first to sixth variable displays of the second special symbols in the time saving state are executed for 7 seconds, and the seventh variable display of the second special symbols is executed for 20 seconds. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol from the first to the sixth time, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds). In the seventh variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (the gaming state is controlled to the normal state), and the first period (10 seconds) is continued as the symbol confirmation period. variable display is stopped. After the first period has elapsed, the second special symbol is variablely displayed for 2 seconds up to four times while the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, first, variable display of the second special symbol is executed 99 times as a time saving state. The first to sixth variable displays of the second special symbols in the time saving state are executed for 7 seconds, and the seventh variable display of the second special symbols is executed for 20 seconds. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol from the first to the sixth time, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds). In the seventh variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a first period (10 seconds) as a symbol confirmation period. After the first period has elapsed, variable display of the second special symbol from the 8th to the 10th time is performed for 2 seconds. Then, the 11th variable display of the second special symbol is executed for 15 seconds. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol from the 8th to the 11th time, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped for a second period (0.5 seconds). Regarding the variable display of the second special symbol from the 12th time onwards, the same control as after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C (see FIG. 10-19(A)) is executed.

Next, variable display of normal symbols will be explained. FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol process shown in FIG. In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the gate switch 21 is turned on, that is, whether the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 (239SGS351). When the gate switch 21 is turned on (239SGS351; Y), the processing when passing through the ordinary map gate (239SGS352) is executed. In the processing at the time of passing through a general map gate, for example, it is determined whether or not the number of stored standard standard cards is an upper limit value (for example, 4). If the number of stored standard figures is not the upper limit, the number of stored standard figures is incremented by 1, the value of the random number MR4 is extracted, and the extracted value is stored as a new pending memory of standard figures.

After executing the processing when passing through the general map gate or when the gate switch 21 is off (239SGS351; N), the CPU 103 executes any of the processes 239SGS353 to 239SGS357 depending on the value of the general map process flag.

The ordinary symbol normal processing of 239SGS353 is executed when the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the normal symbol game (normal symbol variable display) based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the normal symbol normal processing, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is a "hit (ordinary symbol hit)" based on the value of the random number MR4 extracted in the processing when passing through the common symbol gate. Decide before it is displayed (predetermined). Furthermore, in the normal symbol normal processing, a determined normal symbol (either a winning symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the regular symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the ordinary symbol normal processing ends.

The ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern setting process of 239SGS354 is executed when the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is "1". In this normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the ones shown in Figure 10-22 (A) based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "win" and the gaming state. It includes processing to do. In addition, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process in this feature section 239SG, if the display result of the normal symbol is "Lose" and the gaming state is the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is changed to the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1. If the normal symbol display result is "miss" and the gaming state is other than the time saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal symbol (FA1-1). If the fluctuation pattern (FA1-2), which is supposed to have a figure fluctuation time of 30 seconds, is uniquely determined, and the display result of the normal symbol is "hit" and the gaming state is the time saving state, the normal symbol The fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to be the per-win fluctuation pattern (FB1-1) in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is 1 second, and when the display result of the regular symbol is "win" and the gaming state is other than the time-saving state. is a form in which the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is uniquely determined to the winning fluctuation pattern (FB1-2) in which the fluctuation time of the regular symbol is 30 seconds. In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process, when the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "2", and the normal symbol variation pattern setting process ends.

The ordinary symbol variation process of 239SGS355 is executed when the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is "2". This normal symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for variably displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20, a process of measuring the elapsed time after the normal symbol starts variable display, etc. ing. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols reaches the normal variation time, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the normal symbol variation process ends.

The ordinary symbol stop process of 239SGS356 is executed when the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is "3". This normal symbol stopping process includes a process of making settings to stop the variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display 20 and to stop displaying (deriving) a fixed normal symbol that will be the display result of the normal symbol. ing. Then, when the display result is a "win", the value of the regular pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the display result is "miss", the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to "0".

The normal electric accessory opening process of 239SGS357 is executed when the value of the ordinary figure process flag is "4", and a normal electric accessory opening pattern is set based on this. Then, the process of repeatedly changing the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) between the open state and the closed state is executed by driving the solenoid 81 based on the set normal electric accessory opening pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 239SG, as shown in FIG. 10-22(A), the normal electric accessory release pattern 1 is uniquely set based on the display result of the normal symbol being "win". Ru. By setting the normal electric accessory opening pattern, the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) is in the open state for 2 seconds over 8 seconds three times and in the closed state for 1 second twice. Change.

Then, when the control of the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) between the open state and the closed state based on the normal electric accessory opening pattern is completed, the value of the ordinary drawing process flag is updated to "0", The electric accessory release process ends.

By executing the normal symbol process processing as described above, in this feature section 239SG, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes "win", the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) is always opened/closed ( (control to open state and closed state) ends in 8 seconds.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in conventional pachinko gaming machines, when the last variable display in the time-saving state ends, the time-saving flag is cleared at the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the variable display ends; In the pachinko game machine 1 of section 239SG, when the last variable display in the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-23(A), in the conventional pachinko gaming machine 1, if a regular symbol hit occurs within the symbol confirmation period after the last variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state, the game Opening and closing of the variable winning ball device 6B may be performed until the second special symbol is being variably displayed after the state is controlled to the normal state. At this time, a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B (the first variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state is started, and the game ball enters the variable prize winning ball device 6B when the number of second special symbols pending is 3). variable winning ball device 6B), the variable display of the second special symbol will be executed up to five times after the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, and the second special symbol after the time saving state ends. The ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display of symbols increases excessively.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature section 239SG, as shown in FIG. 10-23(B), the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the last variable display in the time saving state ends, so the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the last variable display in the time saving state ends. If the variable display of a normal symbol starts during the variable display of the second special symbol, if the display result of the normal symbol is "hit (ordinary symbol hit)", the display will be executed within the 10 second symbol confirmation period, i.e. , the opening/closing of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed during the period in which the second special symbol pending memory is 4 at most. In other words, in this feature section 239SG, if the variable winning ball device 6B opens and closes during the symbol confirmation period immediately after the time saving control ends, even if a game ball is won in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure is suspended. The memory can only be stored up to 4, and a new 2nd special symbol pending memory may occur after the first variable display of the 2nd special symbol starts after the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. This prevents an excessive increase in the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled based on the variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving state, as in the conventional pachinko game machine described above. There is.

Next, the control executed by the production control CPU 120 will be explained.

FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing a part of the production control process shown in FIG. In the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 first changes the panel corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed and the second special symbol pending memory to the image display device after the jackpot game of jackpot A and jackpot B ends. Panel display effect processing (239SGS361) for executing a panel display effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot or small win by displaying on 5, jackpot A to jackpot C when the gaming state is normal. The number of prize balls received from the CPU 103 during the period from the time when the game state is controlled to one of the jackpot game states until the time when the game state is controlled to the normal state and the variable display starts four times (hereinafter referred to as the consecutive game period) The number of times the notification command or performance process flag has been updated to a value corresponding to the performance processing during a jackpot, etc. The number of times the jackpot game state has been controlled (number of jackpots) and the number of prize balls paid out during the corresponding consecutive game period The number of jackpots and the number of prize balls obtained are displayed on the image display device 5. Result image display processing (239SG363), to update the background displayed on the image display device 5 into a first background image indicating that the gaming state is the normal state and a second background image indicating that the gaming state is the time saving state. background image update process (239SGS364), in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B, the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time and the variable display of the second special symbol for the second and third times (the second special symbol A variable display based on the first pending memory and a variable display based on the second pending memory) to notify that the variable display result is a small hit or a jackpot. Notification performance processing (239SGS365), when the performance mode described later is the second mode, to execute the performance according to the fact that the performance mode is the second mode during the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. 2nd mode compatible production processing (239SGS366), V winning notification production (based on the game ball passing the third count switch 239SG024B) based on the receipt of the V winning notification designation command from the CPU 103 during the small winning game After executing a V winning notification performance process (239SGS367) for executing a performance for notifying that a jackpot game state is controlled after the end of a small win game, any one of S170 to S177 is executed.

FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the panel display performance processing (239SGS363) executed by the performance control CPU 120. In the panel display effect process shown in FIG. 10-25, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the panel display effect execution flag indicating that the panel display effect is being executed is set (239SGS371). .

If the panel display performance execution flag is not set (239SGS371; N), it is determined whether the performance mode is the first mode (239SGS372). In addition, in this feature section 239SG, a first mode and a second mode are preset as production modes, and the first mode is a mode in which panel display production can be executed during variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. It is. In addition, in the second mode, during the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state, a performance different from the panel display performance (for example, notification that the variable display result will be a jackpot or small win by operating the push button 31B, etc.) This is a mode that allows you to perform (direction). These performance modes can be selected by the player by operating the push button 31B and stick controller 31A at the end of a jackpot game to be described later. In addition, when the production mode is set to the second mode, the production control CPU 120 executes the above-mentioned second mode compatible production processing (239SG366) to create a production different from the panel display production (second mode compatible production). ) can be executed.

If the production mode is not the first mode (239SGS372; N), the panel display production execution flag is terminated, while if the production mode is the first mode (239SGS372; Y), the game state designation command is received. It is determined whether or not there is (239SGS373). Whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received may be determined based on whether or not a gaming state designation command reception flag is set.

If no gaming state designation command is received (239SGS373;N), the panel display effect processing is ended. On the other hand, if a gaming state designation command is received (239SGS373; Y), the jackpot type of the previous jackpot is specified from the gaming state designation command and stored (239SGS374). For example, if the received gaming state designation command is the second gaming state designation command, the previous jackpot type is specified as jackpot A and stored, and if the received gaming state designation command is the third gaming state designation command, then The immediately preceding jackpot type is specified and stored as jackpot B, and if the received gaming state designation command is the fourth gaming state specification command, the immediately preceding jackpot type is specified and stored as jackpot C, and the received gaming state specification If the command is the fifth gaming state designation command, the immediately preceding jackpot type is specified as jackpot D and stored, and if the received gaming state specification command is the sixth gaming state specification command, the immediately preceding jackpot type is specified as jackpot E. be specified and memorized.

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type identified in the process of 239SGS374 is jackpot A or jackpot B (239SGS375). When the specified jackpot type is one of jackpot C to jackpot E (239SGS375;N), the panel display effect processing is ended. On the other hand, if the specified jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (239SGS375; Y), the panel display performance execution flag is set (239SGS376), and the display of the panel display screen is started on the image display device 5. (239SGS377), and the panel display effect processing ends.

In addition, if the panel display performance execution flag is set (239SGS371; Y), in the starting winning reception command buffer 239SG194A239SG194A, the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of buffer number 2-0 indicates that the pattern has been determined. It is determined whether 1 is set (239SGS379).

If the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of buffer number 2-0 is not set to 1 (239SGS379;N), check the reception command buffer 239SG194A at the time of start winning (239SGS380), and It is determined whether or not a symbol designation command is stored in the entry (239SGS381). If no symbol designation command is stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 (239SGS381;N), the panel display effect processing is ended. On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 (239SGS381; Y), it is determined whether the jackpot type specified in 239SGS374 is jackpot B (239SGS382).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A (239SGS382; N), the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined based on the symbol designation command stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 (239SGS383). In addition, in the processing of 239SGS383, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is changed to pattern PN- according to whether the symbol designation command stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 indicates a jackpot, small hit, or loss. It is determined at different ratios from patterns 1 to PN-4.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-26 (A), if the symbol designation command indicates a jackpot, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined to pattern PN-1 at a rate of 0%. Then, pattern PN-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, pattern PN-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern PN-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Also, if the symbol designation command indicates a small hit, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined to be pattern PN-1 at a rate of 20%, and pattern PN-2 at a rate of 30%. , pattern PN-3 is determined at a rate of 50%, and pattern PN-4 is determined at a rate of 10%. If the symbol designation command indicates an error, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined to be pattern PN-1 at a rate of 55%, pattern PN-2 at a rate of 34%, Pattern PN-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern PN-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

As shown in FIG. 10-26(B), pattern PN-1 is a display pattern for displaying the image of character A on the image display device 5, and pattern PN-2 is a display pattern for displaying the image of character B on the image display device 5. Pattern PN-3 is a display pattern for displaying an image of character C on image display device 5, and pattern PN-4 is a display pattern for displaying an image of character D on image display device 5. This is the display pattern.

In other words, in this feature section 239SG, when the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 as a corresponding panel during variable display, the proportion that the variable display result becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is set to be the highest, and the image When the character C is displayed on the display device 5, the jackpot expectation is set to be the second highest after the character D is displayed, and when the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, the jackpot expectation is the highest. It is set low (Jackpot expectation level for each character displayed on the image display device 5 as a corresponding panel during variable display: Character D>Character C>Character B>Character A).

Returning to FIG. 10-25, after executing 239SGS383, the production control CPU 120 sets the panel pattern determined flag in buffer number 2-0 to 1 (239SGS384), and also sets the panel pattern corresponding to the variable display of the determined display pattern to 1 (239SGS384). After starting display on the image display device 5 (239SGS385), the process proceeds to 239SGS395.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot B (239SGS382; Y), the panel pattern determined flag in buffer number 2-0 is set to 1 (239SGS386), and the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot B is completed. After starting the display of the corresponding character D-compatible panel on the image display device 5 (239SGS387), the process advances to 239SGS395.

In addition, if the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of buffer number 2-0 is set to 1 (239SGS379; Y), it is determined whether the jackpot type specified in 239SGS374 is jackpot B (239SGS388 ). If the jackpot type is jackpot B (239SGS388; Y), proceed directly to 239SGS395, while if the jackpot type is not jackpot B (239SGS388; N), check the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A (239SGS389 ), it is determined whether a symbol designation command is stored in any of the entries corresponding to the second special symbol pending storage of buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4 (239SGS390). If there is no entry in the second special symbol pending storage in which the symbol designation command is stored (239SGS390; N), the process directly proceeds to 239SGS395. On the other hand, if there is an entry in the second special symbol pending memory in which the symbol designation command is stored (239SGS390; Y), the panel pattern determined flag of the entry is set to "1" indicating that it has been determined. It is determined whether or not there is one (239SGS391).

If the panel pattern determined flag is set (239SGS391; Y), the process directly advances to 239SGS395. On the other hand, if the panel pattern determined flag is not set (239SGS391; N), the display pattern of the second special symbol pending memory compatible panel is determined based on the symbol designation command stored in the entry (239SGS392; ), sets the panel pattern determined flag of the entry to 1 (239SGS393). Then, the display of the second special symbol pending storage corresponding panel is started in the display pattern determined in the process of 239SGS393 (239SGS394), and the process proceeds to 239SGS395.

In addition, in the processing of 239SGS392, the display pattern of the second special figure reservation storage compatible panel may be determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 10-26 (A) (the same ratio as the processing of 239SGS383), but the present invention However, the processing of 239SGS383 and the processing of 239SGS392 may determine the display pattern of the variable display corresponding panel and the display pattern of the second special figure reservation storage corresponding panel at different ratios.

In 239SGS395, process data corresponding to the variation pattern set at the start of the variable display being executed is checked (239SGS395). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the panel display effect (239SGS396), and if it is not the end timing (239SGS396; N), the panel display effect processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is the end timing (239SGS396; Y), the display of the panel display screen and the display of each panel on the image display device 5 is ended (239SGS397), and the panel display effect execution flag is cleared ( 239SGS398), ends the panel display performance execution flag.

FIG. 10-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the result image display process (239SGS365) executed by the performance control CPU 120. In the result image display process shown in FIG. 10-27, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the performance mode is set to the first mode (239SGS400). When the production mode is the second mode (239SGS400; N), the result image display process is ended, and when the production mode is the first mode (239SGS400; Y), it is determined whether or not the result image display timer is operating. (239SGS401).

If the result image display timer is not operating (239SGS401; N), it is determined whether the production control process flag is 3, that is, whether the special drawing waiting process (S173) is being executed. (239SGS402).

If the production control process flag is not 3 (239SGS402;N), the result image display process is ended. On the other hand, if the production control process flag is 3 (239SGS402; Y), the jackpot type stored in the process of 239SGS374 of the panel display production process is further referred to, and the corresponding jackpot type (the immediately preceding one specified from the game control command) is It is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot game) is jackpot D or jackpot E (239SGS403).

When the jackpot type of the last jackpot game specified from the game control command is one of jackpot A to jackpot C (239SGS403;N), the result image display process is ended. On the other hand, if the jackpot type of the last jackpot game specified from the game control command is jackpot D or jackpot E (239SGS403; Y), refer to the remaining second special symbol time reduction number notification command received immediately before (remaining Specify the remaining 2nd special figure time-saving number indicated by the 2nd special figure time-saving number notification command), and determine whether the remaining 2nd special figure time-saving number is 0 or 92, that is, the timing is the 2nd special figure in the time-saving state. It is determined whether it is the timing at which the seventh variable display of the symbol has ended (239SGS404).

Then, when the remaining second special figure time saving number is not 0 or 92 (239SGS404;N), the result image display process is ended. On the other hand, if the remaining number of times of the second special figure time saving is 0 or 92 (239SGS404; Y), set a value corresponding to a time of 19.5 seconds to the result image display period timer and count the timer (timer operation). After starting (239SGS405), the number of jackpots and the number of won prize balls counted in the jackpot number/obtained prize balls counting process, that is, the number of times the jackpot game state was controlled during the above-mentioned consecutive game period, and the corresponding consecutive game period The display of the result image including the number of prize balls paid out is started (239SGS406), and the result image display process is ended.

In addition, the 19.5 seconds set in the result image display period timer in 239SGS405 is the symbol confirmation period (10 seconds) of the variable display of the second special symbol for the seventh time in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. The variable display period (2 seconds x 4) of the second special symbol up to four times after the end of the time saving state, and the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the end of the time saving state. This period is based on the sum of seconds x 3).

In addition, if the result image display timer is operating (239SGS401; Y), after updating the result image display period timer by 1 (239SGS407), check whether the result image display timer after the subtraction update has timed out. (239SGS408).

If the result image display timer has not timed out (239SGS408;N), the display of the result image will continue by ending the result image display process, but if the result image display timer has timed out (239SGS408; Y), the display of the result image is ended (239SGS409), and the result image display process is ended.

In other words, in this feature section 239SG, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game for jackpot D and jackpot E, the variable display result does not become a small hit or a jackpot (even if it becomes a small hit, no V winning occurs), and the time-saving state does not occur. When the process is finished, a result image is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in the time saving state of jackpot E, the result image is displayed even when the variable display of the second special symbol seven times is completed even in the time saving state.

FIG. 10-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the background image update process shown in FIG. 10-24. In the background image update process, the production control CPU 120 first specifies the gaming state based on the value of the remaining second special symbol time reduction number, the value of the production control process flag, etc. (239SGS411).

Then, it is determined whether the identified gaming state is a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state (239SGS412).

If it is either a jackpot game state or a small win game state (239SGS412; Y), the background image update process is terminated, but if it is neither a jackpot game state or a small win game state (239SGS412; N) Furthermore, it is determined whether the state is a normal state in which time saving control is not performed (239SGS413).

If the specified gaming state is the normal state (239SGS413; Y), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed variably (239SGS413a). In addition, whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed variably may be determined by, for example, whether or not each command is stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 of the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A. . If the second special symbol is being displayed variably (239SGS413a; Y), the background image update process is terminated, and if the second special symbol is not being variably displayed (239SGS413a; N), the pending memory of the second special symbol is It is determined whether there is one (239SGS413b). It should be noted that whether or not there is a pending memory of the second special symbol may be determined by whether or not each command is stored in the entry of buffer number 2-1 of the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A.

If there is a pending memory for the second special symbol (239SGS413b; Y), the background image update process is terminated, and if there is no pending memory for the second special symbol (239SGS413b; N), the first background image is displayed. It is determined whether it is inside (239SGS414). If the first background image is being displayed (239SGS414; Y), the background image update process is ended; if the first background image is not being displayed (239SGS414; N), the background image is changed to the first background After updating the image (239SGS415), the background image updating process ends. Thereby, when the gaming state is the normal state, the first background image is displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, if the specified gaming state is not the normal state (239SGS413; N), it is determined whether the production control process flag is 2, that is, whether or not the production process during variable display is being executed ( 239SGS416).

If the production control process flag is 2 (239SGS416; Y), refer to the remaining 2nd special figure time reduction number notification command received immediately before (remaining 2nd special figure indicated by the remaining 2nd special figure time reduction number notification command). 239SGS417).

If the remaining 2nd special figure time saving number is not 88 times (239SGS417; N), the background image update process is finished, and if the remaining 2nd special figure time saving number is 88 times (239SGS417; Y), it is being executed. It is determined whether the variable display variation pattern is PA3-3, that is, a non-reach variation pattern with a special figure variation time of 15 seconds (239SGS418). If the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is not PA3-3 (239SGS418; Y), the background image update process is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is PA3-3 (239SGS418; Y), Furthermore, the control content of the process data of the variable display being executed is specified (239SGS419), and it is determined whether it is time to update the first background image (239SGS420). If it is the update timing to the first background image (239SGS420; Y), the background image is updated to the first background image and the background image update process ends (239SGS421).

On the other hand, if it is not the update timing to the first background image (239SGS420;N), it is determined whether it is the update timing to the second background image (239SGS422), and if it is the update timing to the second background image (239SGS422; Y), updates the background image to the second background image, and ends the background image update process (239SGS423). Note that if it is not the update timing to the second background image (239SGS422;N), the background image update process ends.

In addition, if the production control process flag is not 2 (239SGS416; N), if the remaining number of 2nd special symbol time reduction is not 88 (239SGS417; N), if the fluctuation pattern is not PA3-3 (239SGS418; N), , it is determined whether the second background image is being displayed (239SGS422). Then, if the second background image is being displayed (239SGS422; Y), the background image update process is ended, while if the second background image is not being displayed (239SGS422; N), the background image is changed to the second background image. After updating to the second background image (239SGS423), the background image update process ends.

By executing the background image update process in this way, when the gaming state is the normal state, the image is displayed if the second special symbol is not being displayed variably and there is no pending memory of the second special symbol. A first background image is displayed on the device 5, and a second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when the gaming state is a time saving state. Furthermore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 7 times in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the variable display of the second special symbol will be performed 7 times in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. The result image is displayed on the image display device 5 in the same way as when the process is executed. Then, when the eighth variable display of the second special symbol is started in the time saving state, the background image is once updated from the second background image to the first background image in the image display device 5, and then changed to the second background image again. Updated.

FIG. 10-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether the first variable display start command has been received (239SGS431). . If the first variable display start command reception flag is set (239SGS431; Y), the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A is "1-0" to "1-4". The various command data stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (239SGS432). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

In addition, if the first variable display start command reception flag is not set (239SGS431;N), it is checked whether the second variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, the second variable display start command is received. It is determined whether or not (239SGS433). If the second variable display start command reception flag is set (239SGS433; Y), the buffer number of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A is "2-0" to "2-4". Various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (239SGS434). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Further, if the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (239SGS433;N), the variable display start setting process ends.

After executing 239SGS432 or 239SGS434, the performance control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (239SGS435), and selects the stop symbol of the decorative pattern according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. (239SGS436).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state (239SGS437). It should be noted that whether or not the gaming state is the normal state may be determined based on whether or not the second special symbol time saving number notification command is received. If the gaming state is the normal state (239SGS437; Y), execute a preview effect determination process (239SGS438) that determines the execution of a preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display, and return to 239SGS439. If the game state is the time saving state (2309SGS437; N), the process advances to 239SGS439 without executing the process of 239SGS438.

In 239SGS439, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is PA3-3, which is out of reach and has a special figure variation time of 15 seconds, based on the variation pattern designation command read out in 239SGS435. do. If the variation pattern of the variable display is not PA3-3 (239SGS439;N), the variation pattern of the variable display is any of PA3-5, PB3-3, and PC3-3 whose special figure variation time is 50 seconds. (239SGS440).

If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is one of PA3-5, PB3-3, and PC3-3 (239SGS440; Y), whether the gaming state is a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A. (239SGS441). It should be noted that whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A may be determined based on the jackpot type stored in 2390SGS374 of the panel display performance processing. If the gaming state is a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A (239SGS441; Y), the number of variable displays of the second special symbol controlled by these variable patterns and the time-saving state is one. 239SGS448 (239SGS442).

On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A (239SGS441; N), it is further determined whether the gaming state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B (239SGS443 ). It should be noted that whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B may be determined based on the jackpot type stored in 2390SGS374 of the panel display performance processing. If the gaming state is the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B (239SGS443; Y), the variable display frequency of the second special symbol controlled by these variable patterns and the time-saving state is 3 times. 239SGS448 (239SGS444).

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is PA3-3 in 239SGS439, a process table (in the time-saving state during the variable display) according to the fact that the number of variable displays of the second special symbol controlled in the fluctuation pattern and the time-saving state is 99 times. The variable display result is a jackpot or a small hit in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol controlled by the V stock notification process table that notifies that the V stock (V winning) will occur. Select and proceed to 239SGS448 (239SGS447).

In addition, even when executing the V stock notification effect, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 99 times (more precisely, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 7 times, and then the 92nd 2) There is also a very small probability that the variable display result will be a failure in all of the cases (variable display of special symbols). Therefore, in the processing of 239SGS447, instead of selecting the process table for the V stock notification effect, the effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot or small hit in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol is selected. Alternatively, a process table for execution may be selected.

Also, if the fluctuation pattern in the processing of 239SGS440 is a fluctuation pattern other than PA3-5, PB3-3, PC3-3 (239SGS440;N), after the end of any jackpot game from jackpot C to jackpot E in the processing of 239SGS443. If it is in the time saving state (239SGS443; N), a process table corresponding to each variation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to 239SGS448.

In 239SGS448, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table.

In addition, each process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). ing.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control is executed for the device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) (239SGS449). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 239SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the fluctuation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the fluctuation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (239SGS450). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (239SGS451). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (S172) (239SGS452).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each reduced by 1. Then, control of the presentation device is executed according to the value of the process timer, variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and decorative pattern is displayed according to the value of the variable display time timer. What is necessary is to stop the variable display of and set the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (S173).

As the performance control CPU 120 executes each process as described above, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, as shown in FIG. 10-30. In this case, when the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is finished and the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, the variable display of the second special symbol for 2 seconds will be changed after the 10 second symbol confirmation period. This is executed four times with a 0.5 second symbol confirmation period in between. In addition, these 10-second symbol confirmation periods, four variable display periods of the second special symbol for 2 seconds each, and the symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol for 0.5 seconds each are 19.5 seconds. In seconds, the result image is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished up to four times after the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 changes from the second background image to the first background image. Updated. Thereafter, as a normal state, a variable display of the first special symbol will be executed based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning hole.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-31, if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed for the seventh time. When the game ends, the game state is maintained in the time-saving state, and after a 10-second symbol confirmation period, a variable display of the second special symbol for 2 seconds is executed three times with a 0.5-second symbol confirmation period in between. Ru. In addition, these 10 second symbol confirmation period, three variable display periods of 2 seconds each for the second special symbol (variable display period of the second special symbol for the 8th to 10th time after being controlled to the time saving state), and each The symbol confirmation period after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol for 0.5 seconds, and the 0.5 second after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol for the 11th time after the time saving state is controlled. For 19.5 seconds, the result image is displayed on the image display device 5.

In the 11th variable display after the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state, if the variable display result is wrong, the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display using the variable pattern PA3-3) is executed for 15 seconds. Ru. During the variable display, the display of the result image displayed on the image display device 5 is ended when 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display, and the background image is changed from the second background image to the first background image. Update the background image once. Then, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the background image is updated again from the first background image to the second background image, and the second special symbol that is controlled to be in a time-saving state during variable display is changed. A V stock notification effect is started to notify that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a small win (V stock (V winning) will occur) in any of the displays.

In other words, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 and 10-31, in this feature section 239SG, the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D and the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E are different from each other in the seventh time. After the variable display of the two special symbols is finished, the same effects (display of the result image on the image display device 5 and updating of the background image from the second background image to the first background image) are executed. The time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game for jackpot D ends when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times (the gaming state is controlled to the normal state), whereas for jackpot E After the end of the jackpot game, even after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times, the V stock notification performance is executed and the time saving state continues.

Furthermore, since the number of rounds for jackpot D and jackpot E in the feature section 239SG is set to be the same, the player can determine the type of jackpot game (jackpot game state of jackpot D) executed by winning V during the small win game. It is difficult to determine the jackpot game state of jackpot E and jackpot E (see FIG. 10-6(E)).

Therefore, in the time-saving state after the jackpot game state of jackpot D or the jackpot game state of jackpot E ends, after the variable display of the second special symbol has been executed seven times, the time-saving control is continuously executed. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether the game is true or not.

FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the preview effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-29. In the preview performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (239SGS461). Then, based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern, whether or not to execute the preview performance and the performance pattern are determined (239SGS462).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-33 (A), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided not to perform the preview effect at a rate of 10%, and pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the preview effect in pattern YE-2 at a rate of 40%, it is decided to execute the preview effect in pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, and it is decided to execute the preview effect in pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%. The execution of the preview performance in pattern YE-4 is determined at the ratio of .

In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variation pattern is a Super Reach variation pattern (Super Reach is off), 49% of the time it will be decided not to perform the preview effect, and 30% of the time will be decided to change the pattern. It is decided to execute the preview effect in YE-1, at a rate of 15% it is decided to execute the preview effect in pattern YE-2, and at a rate of 5% it is decided to execute the preview effect in pattern YE-3. , the execution of the preview performance in pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern (normal reach is off), 80% of the time it is decided not to execute the preview effect, and 15% of the time the pattern is YE- 1, determines to execute the preview effect in pattern YE-2 at a rate of 5%, decides to execute the preview effect in pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%, and %, the execution of the preview performance in pattern YE-4 is determined.

In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (non-reach is off), 95% of the time it is decided not to execute the preview effect, and 5% of the time, the pattern is It is decided to execute the preview performance in YE-1, at a rate of 0% it is decided to execute the preview performance in pattern YE-2, and at a rate of 0% it is decided to execute the preview performance in pattern YE-3. , determines execution of the preview performance in pattern YE-4 at a rate of 0%.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(B), in the preview performance, pattern YE-1 is a performance pattern in which the words "Chance!" are displayed as a line on the image display device 5, and pattern YE-2 Pattern YE-3 is a production pattern in which the words "Hot!" are displayed as a line on the image display device 5, and pattern YE-3 is a production pattern in which the words "Very Hot!" are displayed on the image display device 5 as a line. The pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern in which the image of the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 instead of the dialogue.

In other words, as a preview performance in the feature section 239SG, when the character D is displayed on the image display device 5, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is set to be the highest, and the image display device 5 When "It's super hot!" is displayed as the line, the variable display result is set to have a higher probability of being a jackpot than when character D is displayed. When "Chance!" is displayed as a line on the image display device 5, the probability that the variable display result is a jackpot is set to be the lowest (the lines and characters displayed on the image display device 5 as a preview effect) Jackpot expectation level: Character D > "Super hot!" > "Hot!" > "Chance!").

In other words, in the preview performance of the feature section 239SG, the character D is displayed on the image display device 5, similar to when the panel display performance is executed, so that the player can be made aware that the jackpot expectation level is the highest. , it is possible to improve the game's interest.

Returning to FIG. 10-32, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the preview performance in the process of 239SGS462 (239SGS463). When it is decided to execute the preview performance (239SGS463; Y), the performance pattern of the determined preview performance is memorized (239SGS464), a timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance is set, and the preview performance determination process is ended (239SGS467). .

Note that the preview performance is determined by decrementing the value of the preview performance start wait timer by -1 each time the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process, and when the preview performance start wait timer times out. A process table for preview performance corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is selected, and a process timer for preview performance is started. Thereafter, the value of the process timer for preview effects is decremented by 1 every time the variable display process timer is executed, and the value of the process timer for preview effects is changed in the image display device 5 according to the content of the process data corresponding to the value of the process timer for preview effects. A command may be output to the display control unit 123 to display an image according to the pattern.

FIG. 10-34 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect processing shown in FIG. 9. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the ending effect process timer is in operation (239SGS461). When the process timer for ending effect is not operating (239SGS461; N), the process table for ending effect is selected (239SGS462), and the process timer for ending effect is started (239SGS463). Then, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1), the production device (image display device 5 as production parts, production parts various lamps, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled, and the ending performance process is ended (239SGS464).

In addition, if the process timer for ending effect is in operation (239SGS461; Y), the value of the process timer for ending effect is -1 (239SGS465), and it is determined whether the process timer for ending effect has timed out. (239SGS466). If the ending effect process timer times out (239SGS466; Y), it is further determined whether the ending effect process timer that has timed out is the last ending effect process timer (239SGS467). If the ending production process timer that has timed out is not the last ending production process timer (239SGS467; N), the process data is switched (239SGS468). That is, the ending effect process timer is restarted by setting the ending effect process timer setting value set next in the ending effect process table to the process timer (239SGS469). In addition, based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation part control execution data, input control execution data, etc. included in the process data set next, the production device (production parts) The control state is changed (239SGS470) and the process proceeds to 239SGS472.

In addition, if the process timer for ending effect has not timed out in 239SGS466 (239SGS466;N), the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer for round di group effect (239SGS471), and the process timer for 239SGS472 is move on.

At 239SGS472, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the finished jackpot game is a jackpot game of jackpot A or jackpot B (239SGS472). If the finished jackpot game is a jackpot game of jackpot C to jackpot E (239SGS472; N), the ending effect processing is finished, and if the finished jackpot game is a jackpot game of jackpot A or jackpot B ( 239SGS472;Y), as shown in FIGS. 10-35(A) and 10-35(B), a message indicating that the production mode can be changed on the image display device 5 during the ending production, A production mode determination process is executed to accept the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A and decide the production mode from the first mode and the second mode (239SGS473).

Then, if the ending production process timer that timed out in 239SGS467 is the last ending production process timer (239SGS467; Y), it is set to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process of the production control process flag. (239SGS474), ending the ending effect processing.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 when the main feature section 239SG is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game will be described based on FIGS. 10-36 to 10-38. First, as shown in Figures 10-36(A) and 10-36(B), if the first mode is selected as the performance mode, after the jackpot game of jackpot A ends, the player An operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5 that prompts the player to hit the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a winning pattern and enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening. At this time, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started due to the game ball entering the second starting winning hole, the display of the panel display screen on the image display device 5 is started. Incidentally, at this time, the first panel displayed as a panel display effect is a character corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-36(C), when a game ball enters the second start winning hole, the display of the character panel corresponding to each pending memory of the second special symbol is started. At this time, the characters (panels) displayed according to each pending memory of the second special symbol are determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 10-26(A) regardless of the order of the pending memories that occur. The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters (panels) displayed according to each pending memory of the second special symbol may differ depending on the order of the generated pending memories. For example, when targeting the fourth reserved memory of the second special symbol, the rate at which pattern PN-4 is determined as the panel display pattern (character D (the rate at which the panel is displayed) is set higher than the rate at which pattern PN-4 is determined as the panel display pattern when targeting the first to third reserved memories of the second special symbol. In this way, the player may be able to draw attention to whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot or a small win in the fourth variable display of the second special symbol.

Then, when a plurality of game balls enter the second starting prize opening, a maximum of five panels are displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 10-36(D) to 10-36(F). , the display of the panel display screen and each panel is completed, and the decorative pattern becomes a reach. Then, reach performance starts.

In the reach effect, for example, a battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight is executed. If the variable display result is a loss, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (G), the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as a result of the battle performance, and it is announced that the variable display result is a loss. Ru. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a small win or a jackpot, as shown in Figure 10-36 (H), the variable display result becomes a small win when the friendly character wins over the enemy character as a result of the battle performance. You will be notified that you are out of line.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-36 (G), if the variable display ends with the variable display result being a failure, the figure will be displayed in the variable display (up to 4 times) of the second special symbol in the reserved memory. Like 10-36 (E) to 10-36 (H), the reach effect is executed.

In addition, if the variable display result becomes a small hit or a jackpot in any of these variable displays of the second special symbol up to 5 times in total, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state of jackpot C to jackpot E. (If the variable display result is a small win, the condition is that a V win occurs during the small win game).

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-37(A) and 10-37(B), if the first mode is selected as the production mode, after the jackpot game of jackpot B ends, the player An operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5 that prompts the player to hit the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a winning pattern and enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening. At this time, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started due to the game ball entering the second starting winning hole, the jackpot A A panel of the character D (panel corresponding to the character D for the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B) having a larger size than the panel display performance in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-37(C) and 10-37(D), when the display of the panel corresponding to character D ends after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative pattern becomes a reach. After the decorative symbol becomes a reach, the image display device 5 displays the variable display, the variable display based on the memory of the first retention of the second special symbol, and the second retention of the second special symbol as a win/fail notification effect. An operation promotion image for the push button 31B corresponding to each variable display based on memory is displayed.

When the player operates the push button 31B three times while these push button 31B operation promotion images are displayed, the variable display, the variable display based on the first reserved memory of the second special symbol, If any variable display result of the variable display based on the second reserved memory of the second special symbol is a failure, as shown in Figure 10-37 (E), these three variable display results will be displayed as a result of the success/failure notification effect. It is reported that all variable display results are negative.

At this time, the image display device 5 performs an operation to prompt the player again to hit the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a normal hit and win the game ball into the second starting prize opening. A promotional image will be displayed. Then, after all three variable displays of the second special symbol controlled in the time-saving state are completed, as shown in Figure 10-37 (F), the game ball enters the second starting prize opening. A panel display performance may be executed for variable displays corresponding to the suspended storage of up to four generated second special symbols. In this case, the panel display effects include a panel (for example, a cross mark on character D) indicating that the variable display of the second special symbol three times corresponding to the panel of character D has already been completed as the first panel. By displaying a panel labeled with ``2'', the player may be made to pay more attention to whether or not the remaining variable display results of the second special drawings up to four times will be a small hit or a jackpot.

On the other hand, when the player operates the push button 31B three times while the operation promotion image for the push button 31B shown in FIG. If the variable display result of either the variable display based on the second pending memory or the variable display based on the second pending memory of the second special symbol is a small hit or a jackpot, it is shown in Figure 10-37 (G). As a result of the win/fail notification performance, it is announced that the variable display result will be a small win or a jackpot in any of these three variable displays.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (A), after the jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot E ends, the player is asked to shoot the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a regular hit. An operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5, which prompts the user to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening. In the time-saving state, a second background image (for example, the night background image shown in FIG. 10-38(B)) is displayed on the image display device 5, indicating that the gaming state is in the time-saving state.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-38(B) and 10-38(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed seven times, the image display device 5, the result image is displayed. If the variable display of the second special symbol for the seventh time is the variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, that is, the variable display of the second special symbol for the seventh time ends. When the gaming state is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state, the result image and the second background image are displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 10-38(C) and 10-38(D). In the state where is being displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed up to four times. Then, the fourth variable display of the second special symbol has been completed since the gaming state was controlled to the normal state (the variable display of the second special symbol has been performed a maximum of 11 times since the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D). Based on this fact, the display of the result image on the image display device 5 is finished, and the second background image is updated to the first background image.

On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol at the seventh time is the variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, that is, the variable display of the second special symbol at the seventh time If the gaming state continues in the time saving state even after the end of the game, the result image and the second background image are displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 10-38(D) and 10-38(E). In the state where is being displayed, variable display of the second special symbol is performed three times (variable display of the second special symbol from the 8th to the 10th time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E). Then, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (F), when the variable display of the second special symbol starts for the 11th time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the display of the result image ends, and the second background The image is updated to the first background image. Further, after the background image is updated to the first background image, a V stock notification effect is executed on the image display device 5, and the background image is updated to the second background image again. Note that the V stock notification performance executed in this feature section 239SG is a performance in the same manner as the above-mentioned V winning notification performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the V stock notification performance is It may be a performance that differs in part from the winning notification performance (for example, a performance that differs in displayed characters, sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, LED light emission patterns, etc.).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature section 239SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-36(C) and 10-37(B), the second special symbol of one time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A is In the time saving state for variable display, the panel of characters A to C can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel display effect, while the second special symbol for three times after the end of the jackpot B jackpot game is displayed. In the time-saving state for variable display, the image display device 5 can display the panel of character D (the panel corresponding to character D for the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B). In other words, since the character panel displayed as a panel display effect differs depending on the number of variable displays of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, the interest in the time saving state can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 239SG, in the time saving state that targets the variable display of the second special symbol once after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, it is possible to display the panel of characters A to character D as a panel display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the time saving state that targets the variable display of the second special symbol once after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, the panel display It is possible to display the panel of only characters A to C as a performance, and the panel of character D is displayed as a panel display performance only when the target is the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the end of the jackpot B jackpot game. It may be possible.

In addition, in this feature section 239SG, when the variable display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot B, the jackpot gaming state is not controlled to the small winning gaming state, but is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of jackpot B, and the jackpot B jackpot is controlled. In the time-saving state that targets the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the end of the game, a panel corresponding to character D is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game for jackpot B. If the display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot B, the interest in the time-saving state after the jackpot B game is completed can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-36(C), in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, the panel of characters A to D can be displayed as a panel display effect on the image display device 5, and the panel When character D is displayed as a display effect, the percentage of variable display results that become jackpots is set higher than when characters A to C are displayed, so the time saving state after jackpot A ends the jackpot game. It is possible to improve the game's interest by displaying a panel of character D as a panel display effect in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the performance control CPU 120 executes performance mode determination processing during the ending performance after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A and jackpot B, so that the performance mode is set to the first performance mode by the player's operation. mode and the second mode can be selected. If the production mode is set to the first mode, the panel display production is executed in the time saving state, while if the production mode is set to the second mode, the second mode is supported in the time saving state. A performance (for example, a performance that notifies that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a small win by operating the push button 31B, etc.) is executed. In other words, in this feature section 239SG, the player can select a performance to be executed in a time-saving state, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the performance in the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, in this feature section 239SG, after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, the time saving state is controlled to target the variable display of the second special symbol once, and after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B, the second special symbol is displayed three times. A time-saving state is applied to variable display of symbols. In the time saving state that targets the variable display of the second special symbol three times, the variable display of the second special symbol three times (the variable display of the second special symbol being executed as the first variable display) and the variable display based on the reserved memory of the second special symbol that occurred during the variable display), and execute the win/fail notification performance, and if the variable display result is small in any of the three variable displays of the second special symbol. Since it is possible to notify that there is a hit or a jackpot, it is possible to further improve the interest in the time-saving state where the variable display of the second special symbol is performed three times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B. It is possible.

In addition, in the success/failure reporting performance of the feature section 239SG, as shown in FIG. 10-37(D), the display is based on the fact that the push button 31B has been operated three times for the variable display of the second special symbol three times. Although an example has been given of a form in which it is possible to notify that the variable display result is a small hit or a jackpot in any of the three variable displays of the second special symbol, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The number of times the push button 31B is operated as a notification effect may be only once or twice. For example, if the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, the first operation of the push button 31B will notify that the variable display result will be a jackpot or small hit, If the variable display result is a jackpot or small hit in the variable display based on the reserved memory of the first and second special symbols (the second variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state), press the second push button 31B. It notifies you that the variable display result will be a jackpot or small hit by operation, and the variable display result is displayed based on the reserved memory of the second 2nd special symbol (variable display of the 3rd second special symbol in the time saving state). If the result is a jackpot or a small win, it is sufficient to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot or a small win by operating the push button 31B for the third time.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-29, 10-32, and 10-33, when the gaming state is normal, a preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot is executed during the variable display. Therefore, when the image of character D is displayed on the image display device 5 as the preview effect, it is more effective than when lines such as "Chance!", "It's hot!", and "It's super hot!" are displayed. Since a variable display result becomes a jackpot at a high rate, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 in the preview performance in addition to the panel display performance, which increases the interest in the game. can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 239SG, a mode in which a preview effect can be executed during variable display only when the gaming state is the normal state has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect during variable display is , it may be possible to execute the variable display even when the gaming state is the time saving state.

In addition, in this feature section 239SG, if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, but when the jackpot E of jackpot If the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time-saving state after the end of the game, the V winning notification performance and the performance mode will be Since the same V stock notification performance is executed, the time saving state is a time saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 99 times, and the variable display result is a jackpot in the variable display of the remaining second special symbol. Since the player can recognize that the probability of a small win or a small win is extremely high (easily controlled to a jackpot game state), the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-22 (B), the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) opens and closes for 8 seconds, while as shown in Figure 10-23 (B), the Since the symbol confirmation period of the last variable display in the state is set to the second period of 10 seconds, if a normal symbol hit occurs during the last variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state and the game ball Even if it becomes possible to win a prize in the second starting prize opening, the opening and closing of the variable winning ball device 6B will be completed by the time the first variable display of the second special symbol starts after the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. Therefore, when the gaming state is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being excessively executed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-30 and 10-31, the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the 7th second special symbol in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D and the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E Since the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the 7th second special symbol in the time saving state is both set to the second period of 10 seconds, after the end of the jackpot game via the small win game, 7 When the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the player recognizes whether or not the time saving state has not yet ended (whether or not the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E). You can prevent this from happening.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-31, in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times, the second special symbol is suspended and stored. After executing the variable display of the second special symbol four times corresponding to the number, and executing the variable display of the second special symbol seven times, the variable display of the second special symbol for the fourth time (controlled in a time saving state) In the 11th variable display of the second special symbol since Since the V stock notification effect is executed based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time, it is possible to notify the player that the time-saving state is still continuing while making the player think that the gaming state has been controlled to the normal state. You can improve your interest.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-11, 10-12, 10-19 (B), and 10-20, the second special symbol for the 7th time is variablely displayed in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. is executed and the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed up to 4 times in a special symbol variation time of 2 seconds, while the time reduction after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E After the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the state, the variable display of the second special symbol will be executed up to four times with a special symbol variation time of 2 seconds, so the special symbol variation times may differ. This can prevent the player from recognizing that the time saving state is still continuing after the variable display of the second special symbol has been executed seven times.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, in the feature section 239SG, the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the variable display result is a jackpot at a ratio of 1 in the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. , the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pachinko machine that can set any one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities in the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. The present invention may be applied to the gaming machine 1. In this case, during the variable display, it is possible to perform both a preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot and a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed as a preview performance, the setting suggestion performance may be executed at a higher rate than when a performance with a low expectation of a jackpot is executed as a preview performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-39 to 10-44 as modification example 239SG-1, in the variable display start process, the rear variable display is performed as a performance in the latter half of the variable display (for example, during the reach performance). The rear variable display suggestion effect determination processing that determines whether to execute the suggestive effect during the display, and the front variable display that is executed during the first half of the variable display (for example, during the period from the start of the variable display until reaching reach) The performance control CPU 120 executes a rear variable display suggestive performance determination process that determines whether or not to execute the suggestive performance during display.

FIG. 10-39 is a flowchart showing the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process in the variable display start setting process. In the rear variable display suggestive performance determination process shown in FIG. 10-39, the performance control CPU 120 refers to the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A and specifies the value of the pending display flag corresponding to the variable display (239SGS501). The pending display flag is a flag for displaying the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory on the image display device 5, and is stored in association with each entry in the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A. . In addition, in this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the starting winning reception command buffer 239SG194A is specified, and the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" is specified, and the second If the display start command reception flag is set, it is sufficient to specify the entry "2-0" of the reception command buffer 239SG194A at the time of start winning.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestion performance during rear variable display and the performance to be executed as the suggestion performance during rear variable display based on the value of the pending display flag specified in 239SGS301 (239SG502).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-40(A), if the value of the pending display flag specified in 239SGS501 is "0", that is, if the pending display preview effect is being executed for the variable display in question. If not, at a rate of 90% it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, at a rate of 10% it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the variable rear display, and at a rate of 0% it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. It is decided to execute a set suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during variable display. In addition, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 239SGS501 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If so, at a rate of 50% it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, at a rate of 50% it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 239SGS501 is "3", that is, if the pending memory display is displayed with a blue camera as a pending display notice effect targeting the variable display, 30 At a rate of 35%, it is decided to not execute the suggestion performance during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 35%, it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion performance as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 35%, it is decided to perform the suggestion performance during the rear variable display. Decide whether to perform the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 239SGS501 is "4", that is, if the pending memory display is displayed with a red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display, the value is 0. At a rate of 30%, it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion performance as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 70%, it is decided to perform a suggestion performance during the rear variable display. Decide whether to perform the setting suggestion effect.

In other words, in the feature section 239SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display preview performance is executed for the variable display, the performance is higher than when the hold display preview performance is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the suggestion effect during rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display preview effect for the variable display (if the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed as a white rectangle or star shape as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It was set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display was determined based on the ratio, and the pending memory display was displayed as a white rectangle or star shape as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the set suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case of the rear variable display.

In addition, we focused on cases where the pending memory display was displayed with a blue or red camera (when the value of the pending display flag was "3" or "4") as a pending display preview effect for the variable display. Then, if the pending memory display was displayed on a red camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display, the pending memory display will be displayed on a blue camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is decided at a higher rate than when the rear variable display is displayed. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as a suggestion effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in the rear variable display.

From the above, in the feature section 239SG of the present embodiment, if the pending memory display is displayed in a rectangle or star shape as a pending display notice performance for the variable display, the rear variable display suggestion performance is While it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion performance will be executed, the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display preview performance targeting the variable display. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed as the suggestion performance during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on a red camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display, the pending memory display will be displayed on a blue camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display. Since the percentage of setting suggestion presentations being executed as suggestion presentations during the rear variable display is higher than when the rear variable display is displayed, the game is more likely to be played depending on whether the setting suggestion presentation is executed as the suggestion presentation during the rear variable display. It is now possible to draw people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 10-39, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the suggested performance during rear variable display in the process of 239SGS502 (239SGS503). If it is decided in the processing of 239SGS502 not to execute the suggestion effect during rear variable display, the suggestion effect determination process during rear variable display is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during rear variable display in the process of 239SGS502, further In the process of , 239SGS502, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to execute a jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display (239SGS504).

In the process of 239SGS502, when it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display, the performance pattern of the jackpot suggestion performance is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the processing for determining the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is executed. End (239SGS505).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 239SGS505, there are a total of three effect patterns, pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3, as shown in FIG. 10-40(B). Among these production patterns, pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (jackpot expectation: low) that suggests that the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot (jackpot expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is Pattern AS-3 is a performance pattern that suggests that the percentage of the variable display result becoming a jackpot is higher than pattern AS-1 (jackpot expectation: medium), and pattern AS-3 has the highest percentage of the variable display result becoming a jackpot. This is a performance pattern that suggests a high level of success (expectation level of jackpot: high).

Then, in the processing of the 239SGS505 described above, as shown in FIG. 10-41, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance pattern of the jackpot suggestion performance to pattern AS-1 at a rate of 10%. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when it is decided in the process of 239SGS502 to execute a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and selects the setting value (pachinko gaming machine 1 (239SGS506). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect based on the specified setting value, and ends the suggestion effect determination process during rear variable display (239SGS507).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the 239SG307, there are a total of five patterns, pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5, as shown in FIG. 10-40(B). Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an even number (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), and pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (for example, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the setting value is one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that it is determined whether the setting value is 5 or 6 (high setting). For patterns SS-3 and SS-4, when the setting value is either 5 or 6, the expectation level for the setting value to be 5 or 6 is considered to be low. 6 is said to have high expectations.

In addition, in this modified example 239SG-1, setting values 1 to 4 will be explained as low settings and setting values 5 and 6 as high settings. Alternatively, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set by setting the setting values 1 and 2 as low settings, setting values 3 and 4 as intermediate settings, and setting values 5 and 6 as high settings.

In the processing of the 239SGS507 described above, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance pattern to pattern SS- at a rate of 60% when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, as shown in FIG. 10-42. 1, pattern SS-2 is selected at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 6%, and pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Decided on SS-5. In addition, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, and Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of %, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 9%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 20%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 50%, and 10%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of %, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and 30%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of %, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In this way, in this modified example 239SG-1, by executing the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-1 and pattern SS-2, it is suggested that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the setting value is By executing the value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, it is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-5, it is determined that the setting value is 6.

FIG. 10-43 is a flowchart showing the front variable display suggested effect determination process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process. In the front variable display suggestive effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-43, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (239SGS511). Further, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to execute a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display (239SGS512).

If it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion performance as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display, based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the variable display result, whether or not to execute the suggestion performance during the front variable display and the suggestion during the front variable display. The performance to be executed is determined from the character performance and the timer performance (239SGS513). Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-44 (A), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to not execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. At 30%, it is decided to execute a character presentation as a suggestion presentation during the front variable display, and at a rate of 30%, it is decided to execute a timer presentation as a suggestion presentation during the front variable display. In addition, if the variable display result is incorrect, 70% of the time it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and 25% of the time it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display. Then, at a rate of 5%, it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display.

In other words, when it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the rate of execution during the front variable display is higher than when the variable display result is a loss. It is decided to execute the suggestion effect, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution of the character effect and the timer effect are determined at the same rate as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, while the variable display result If it is a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestion performance during the front variable display.In other words, the jackpot expectation level of the timer performance is higher than the jackpot expectation level of the character performance. It is set.

In addition, if execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 executes the suggestion effect during the front variable display based on the execution of the setting suggestion effect and the variable display result. The effect to be executed as the presence/absence and the suggestion effect during front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (239SGS514). Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-44 (B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. At 70%, it is decided to execute a character effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display, and at a rate of 70%, it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display. In addition, if the variable display result is incorrect, at a rate of 80% it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and at a rate of 0% it is decided to execute the character effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. Then, at a rate of 20%, it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display.

In other words, when it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the ratio of the variable display result to the front variable display is higher than when the variable display result is a loss. The execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and the setting is such that, regardless of whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, the execution of the character effect will not be determined as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. That is, the jackpot expectation level of the timer performance is set higher than the jackpot expectation level of the character performance.

For this reason, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution of the timer effect is decided at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so the front variable display is indicated. When a timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-43, after executing 239SGS513 or 239SGS514, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the suggestion effect during front variable display (239SGS515). If it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the process for determining the suggestion effect during the front variable display ends, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front section is further It is determined whether or not it has been decided to execute a character presentation as a suggested presentation during variable display (239SGS516).

If it has been decided to execute a character performance as a suggested performance during the front variable display, a performance pattern for the character performance is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the process for determining a suggested performance during the front variable display is ended. (239SGS517).

As for the effect patterns of character effects that can be determined in the process of 239SGS517, there are two effect patterns in total, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, as shown in FIG. 10-44(C). . Among these production patterns, pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (jackpot expectation level: low) that suggests that by displaying character A (not shown) on the image display device 5, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot is the lowest. Yes, pattern CS-2 is a production pattern (Jackpot expectation: medium) that suggests that the proportion of variable display results that become jackpots by displaying character B (not shown) on image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1. ).

Therefore, in the process of 239SGS517, as shown in FIG. 10-45(A), if the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance pattern of the character performance to pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20%. , and pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the performance pattern of the character performance is determined to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80%, and pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

In addition, when it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the above-mentioned section variable display suggestive effect determination process is ended (239SGS518).

As the performance patterns of the timer performance that can be determined in the processing of the 239SGS518, there are a total of two performance patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. 10-44(C). Among these performance patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the proportion of variable display results that become jackpots on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 for character performances (Jackpot expectation: high ), this is a performance that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display together with the image of character It suggests that this is higher than the character performance pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 (jackpot expectation level: high), and the period until the start of execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is displayed for 25 seconds with the image of character Y. (See Figure 10-45 (C)).

Therefore, in the processing of 239SGS518, the performance control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Pattern TS-1 is determined at a rate of 80%, and pattern TS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. In addition, if the rear variable display suggestion performance that has been decided to be executed is a setting suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 determines pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decided on 2.

In other words, when a timer effect is executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2 (in other words, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2) (in other words, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-1), When the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the rate at which the setting suggestion performance is executed as the suggestion performance during rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the modified example 239SG-1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance period of the timer performance and the characters displayed on the image display device 5. Furthermore, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2, it is possible to make the player expect the setting suggestion effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game's interest.

As described above, in this modified example 239SG-1, as shown in FIG. 10-44(D), when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during front variable display, the character The expectation of jackpot is set higher than when the performance is executed, and the setting suggestion performance is set as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character performance is performed as a suggestion performance during the front variable display. It is set to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-39 to 10-46, when it is decided to execute the front variable display suggestion effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display effect processing (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the front variable display suggestive effect may be set, and the effect device may be controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display effect processing (S172). In addition, when it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestive effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the value of the rear variable display suggestive effect start wait timer by 1 every time the variable display effect process is executed. Then, based on the fact that the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display becomes 0, process data corresponding to the determined performance pattern of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is set. Then, in the subsequent variable display rendering process (S172), the rendering device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer.

In addition, in the characteristic section 239SG, in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, V Although the stock notification effect is executed and the player is notified that the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the present invention is not limited to this. As modification example 239SG-2, in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, for example, a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B during the period when the result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a new In response to the fulfillment of conditions such as the occurrence of a starting prize (starting winning), a special announcement is made to notify that the time-saving state is the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, as a production different from the V stock notification production. The performance may be made executable.

By doing this, when the control is in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the same result image as when the control is in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D is displayed. During the period, it is announced that the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E in accordance with the occurrence of the start winning of the second special symbol, so that the game interest can be improved. Further, the special notification performance is not executed unless a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B while the result image is displayed on the image display device 5. In other words, since the player can select whether or not to execute the special notification effect, the range of game selections can be expanded and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modified example 239SG-2, a form in which both the V stock notification performance and the special notification performance can be executed in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, only the special notification performance of the V stock notification performance and the special notification performance may be executable.

Furthermore, in this modification 239SG-2, a special notification effect can be executed in response to a game ball winning a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B during the period when the result image is displayed on the image display device 5. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special notification effect may be executed in response to a game ball winning a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B at any timing.

In addition, in the feature section 239SG, a mode is exemplified in which the panel display effect is executed in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A and jackpot B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot E is controlled via the small win based on the variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game B, the panel display performance is executed in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game. You may. In addition, when executing the panel display effect in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot E, the panel display effect is started from the last variable display in the time-saving state, and the variable display and the game state are The panel display effect may be executed over a maximum of three variable displays of the second special symbol after the second special symbol is controlled to the normal state. In particular, the panel display effects include, from the last variable display of the time saving state, to the panel displaying the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A on the image display device 5 in the same way as the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B. A panel of character D that is larger in size than the display effect (a panel compatible with character D for the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B) is displayed, and the variable display and the game state are controlled to the normal state, and then executed. By executing the win/fail notification performance for the variable display of the second special symbols three times (suspended storage of the three second special symbols), a panel corresponding to character D is displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel display performance. In this case, it is possible to further increase the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot or a small win.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 175SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 175SG in this embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 11-1 to 11-13. FIG. 11-1 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns. In FIGS. 11-3, (A) is a diagram showing a table for determining a preview performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the preview performance. In FIG. 11-4, (A) to (C) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of preview performance. In FIG. 11-5, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the configuration of effects of super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2. In FIG. 11-6, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of super reach α1. In FIG. 11-7, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of super reach β2. In FIGS. 11-8, (A) is a diagram comparing the production contents of the first stage performance and the second stage performance, and (B) is a timing chart showing the display status of dialogue. In FIG. 11-9, (A) is a timing chart showing changes in display, sound, and light output levels in normal reach, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of a reach title. In FIGS. 11-10, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of the first stage performance and the second stage performance. In Figures 11-11, (A) is a diagram showing changes in the switching performance, (B) is a diagram comparing the preview performance and the switching performance, and (C) is a diagram comparing the display periods of the preview performance and the switching performance. It is. In FIGS. 11-12, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of switching performance. In FIGS. 11-13, (I) to (L) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of switching performance.

In the following, configurations that are similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 239SG, or have a different form, arrangement position, etc., but have similar functions, will be given the same reference numerals, and a detailed explanation will be omitted. The differences from the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in section 239SG will be mainly explained.

(variation pattern)
As shown in FIG. 11-1, among the variation patterns of the first special symbol in this feature section 175SG, the special symbol variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern (normal reach production) is executed is super reach. It is set shorter than super reach α1, α2 and super reach β1, β2, which are super reach fluctuation patterns in which the reach effect (super reach effect) is executed. In addition, regarding the special figure variable display time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α1, α2, super reach β1, β2 is executed in this feature section 175SG, The special figure variable display time is set longer in the variable pattern in which the ready-to-reach effect is executed than in the variable pattern in which the ready-to-reach effect of the super reach α1 and α2 is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 175SG, since the expected degree of jackpot is set high such that the variable display result is "jackpot" in the order of Super Reach β2, Super Reach β1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach α1, and Normal Reach, the normal reach fluctuation pattern And in the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the feature section 175SG. In this feature section 175SG, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of pending memories, and the gaming state.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-2, if the variable display result is a jackpot (non-time saving), select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. The fluctuation patterns are PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern). (variation pattern) and PB1-5 (super reach β2 jackpot variation pattern).

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot (short time), select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to change the variation pattern to PB1-6 (non-reach jackpot variation). pattern).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 error variation pattern), and PA2. -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α2 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is off), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is off) is determined.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3 or more, select the variation pattern determination table B for losses and select the corresponding Using variation pattern determination table B for misses, change the variation patterns into PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern for non-reach misses), PA2-1 (variation pattern for normal reach misses), and PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern for super reach α1 misses). One of PA2-3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α2 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is off) is determined.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table C for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-3 using the fluctuation pattern determination table C for failure. (Non-reach out-of-reach shortening variation pattern for time saving) is decided.

In other words, if the variable display result is "miss" in this feature section 175SG, the special figure variable display time is However, the rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to the shorter shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3) than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), so the game will be delayed. While preventing this, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-1, the variable display of super reach α1 (variable display of variation patterns PA2-2 and PB1-2) in this feature section 175SG has a special figure variable display time of 40 seconds, This is a variable display in which a battle effect in which an ally character A (see FIG. 11-4(A)) and an enemy character (not shown) engage in a battle (confrontation) is executed as a reach effect. The variable display of Super Reach α2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and ally character B (see Figure 11-4 (B)) as a super reach effect. This is a variable display in which a battle effect between the character and the enemy character is executed. The variable display of Super Reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and ally character C (see Figure 11-4 (C)) as a super reach effect. This is a variable display in which a battle effect between the character and an enemy character (not shown) is executed. The variable display of Super Reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a super reach effect, three ally characters A, B, C and an enemy character are displayed. This is a variable display in which a battle performance with (not shown) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the jackpot expectation of each variable display in the feature section 175SG is set so that the jackpot expectation of super reach β2 is the highest. The jackpot expectation is set higher in the order of reach α2, super reach α1, normal reach, and non-reach (jackpot expectation in each variable display in this feature section 175SG: super reach β2 > super reach β1 > super reach α2 > super Reach α1 > Normal reach > Non-reach).

In other words, if you pay attention to the variable display of super reach, in this feature section 175SG, the jackpot expectation level differs depending on which of the ally characters A to C is the ally character that appears in the reach effect (the jackpot expectation of each ally character Degree: Character C>Character B>Character A).

(Preview performance)
In this feature section 175SG, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the preview performance in the variable display in the preview performance determination process (see step 239SGS462 in FIG. 10-29). In this feature section 175SG, in the preview performance determination process, only the step-up preview performance (also referred to as SU preview performance) in which the preview image changes in stages as described later is determined. These preview performances include, but are not limited to, other types of preview performances other than step-up preview performances, such as character previews in which the aforementioned characters appear, and group previews in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area. When determining the execution of these different types of preview performances, the timing to start the preview performance differs depending on the format of the preview performance, so the timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance, which will be described later, may be used. , different periods may be set depending on the form of the preview presentation.

Then, a random number for determining a preview performance is extracted, and a table for determining the type of preview performance shown in FIG. .

In this feature section 175SG, the random number for determining the preview performance is a random number in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of judgment values for the random number for determining the preview performance is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the random number for determining the preview performance may be changed as appropriate. All you have to do is decide. Further, a random number counter for determining a preview performance for generating these random numbers for determining a preview performance is set in the RAM 122, and the random number counter for determining a preview performance is updated every timer interrupt in a random number update process.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), this feature section 175SG has a preview effect A in which character A appears (see FIG. 11-4 (A)) and a character Preview production B (see Figure 11-4 (B)) in which character B appears and preview production C in which character C (see Figure 11-4 (C)) appears after characters A and B appear are executed. It is considered possible.

In the table for determining the type of preview performance, as shown in Figure 11-3 (A), for each of "Non-execution of preview performance", "Preview performance A", "Preview performance B", and "Preview performance C" , when the variable display result is a jackpot, when the fluctuation pattern is out of reach, and when the fluctuation pattern is out of reach. Assigned so that

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, 10 judgment values are assigned to the "non-execution" of the preview effect, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the "notice effect A". 30 determination values are assigned to "notice presentation B" and 40 determination values are assigned to "notice presentation C". In addition, in the case where the fluctuation pattern is out of reach, 10 judgment values are assigned to "Non-execution" of the preview performance, 40 judgment values are assigned to "Notice performance A", and 40 judgment values are assigned to "Not executed" of the preview performance. Thirty judgment values are assigned to ``Preview Effect B'', and 20 judgment values are assigned to ``Preview Effect C''. In addition, in the case where the fluctuation pattern is out of reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to the "non-execution" of the preview performance, 10 judgment values are assigned to the "notice performance A", Six determination values are assigned to "notice presentation B" and four determination values are assigned to "notice presentation C."

By assigning the determination value in this way, in the case of a jackpot in the variable display, the preview effect is more likely to be executed than when the super reach is off or the normal reach is off. In addition, if it is a jackpot, "notice effect C" is likely to be executed, if it is out of reach, "notice effect A" is likely to be executed, and if it is out of reach, "non-execution" is determined. It's getting easier.

By setting in this way, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the preview effect is executed than when the preview effect is not executed. Furthermore, in the preview performances, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher when preview performance C is executed than when preview performances A and B are executed. In other words, the preview performance is a suggestion performance that suggests that a jackpot game state will be controlled by switching and displaying character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 of a plurality of types of characters A to C.

In addition, the expectation level (reliability) of each preview performance A to C is the probability that each preview performance will be executed and a jackpot, the probability that each preview performance will be executed and a jackpot, and the probability that each preview performance will be executed and a jackpot. This is the value divided by the sum of the probability of not hitting the jackpot (probability of execution of each preview performance).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute any of the preview performances, that is, whether it has decided to execute any of the preview performances, ``preview performance A'', ``preview performance B'', and ``preview performance C''. If the determination is made and none of the preview performances of "Preview Performance A", "Preview Performance B", and "Preview Performance C" have been determined, that is, if "Non-Execution" is determined, then the relevant preview performance determination process is performed. end. On the other hand, when one of "preview effect A", "preview effect B", and "preview effect C" is determined, the type of the determined preview effect is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and a preview effect execution determination flag is set. After being turned on, the preview performance determination process is ended.

(Super reach production composition)
Next, the production structure of super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2 will be explained based on FIGS. 11-5 to 11-13.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 175SG, not only the variable display of super reaches α1, α2, β1, and β2, but also the predetermined timing in the variable display of normal reaches other than super reaches α1, α2, β1, and β2 (for example, Before entering the reach display mode, after entering the reach display mode, etc.), friendly characters A to C and an enemy character (not shown) appear, and there is some kind of battle between friendly characters A to C and the enemy character (not shown). (For example, a mini-game), and depending on whether the friendly character wins or loses against the enemy character, the variable display result may suggest the possibility of a "jackpot" or "jackpot" or You may be notified that you have fallen out of line.

In the variable display of Super Reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, in the normal reach performance before the variable display mode changes to the reach display mode and after the variable display mode changes to the reach mode, the friendly characters A to C and the enemy character (not shown) The first half of the battle is staged, and while the battle is still unresolved, the second half of the battle is staged as a super reach stage through the shutter stage or blackout stage, which will be described later.

As shown in Figure 11-5, in the variable display of super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, which are super reach variation patterns, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes the jackpot display result, and the jackpot game state is entered. As a suggestion effect indicating the possibility of being controlled, a normal reach effect is executed based on the variable display mode becoming a reach display mode, and then a super reach effect is developed and a super reach effect is executed. Further, the preview effect can be executed before the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-reach display mode.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (A) to (D), the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative symbols in the variable display of super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since then, if it has been decided to execute a preview performance, one of preview performances A to C is executed (see FIGS. 11-6(A) and 11-7(A)). Next, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is set to the ready-to-reach display mode, and the normal ready-to-reach effect is started (see FIGS. 11-6(B) and 11-7(B)).

In the normal reach performance, there is a first half of the battle where characters A to C battle with enemy characters, and a shutter performance or blackout that makes it difficult to see a predetermined image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the first half of the battle. A production (special production), a pre-stage production (first information display production) that is executed after the shutter production or blackout production and displays the previous dialogue (first information), and a pre-stage production (first information display production) that is executed after the preliminary production and displays the previous dialogue (first information). A second stage performance (second information display stage) that displays a second line (second information) different from the first information) is executed after the second stage stage performance, and the movable body 32 is moved from the origin position above the image display device 5. A movable object effect is performed in which the movable object falls (moves) to a effect position that overlaps with the substantially central position on the front side of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, although it is not executed in Super Reach α1 and α2, in the case of Super Reach β1 and β2, multiple types of specific images (for example, each character A switching effect (special effect) in which character images corresponding to A to C) are switched and displayed is executed.

In addition, in the feature section 175SG, in the normal reach effects of Super Reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, the first half of the battle, the shutter effect, the blackout effect (special effect), the first stage effect (first information display effect), and the second stage effect. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the later-described battle effects (super reach effects A to D) are executed after the effect (second information display effect) and the movable object effect are executed, the present invention is not limited to this. As a super reach other than super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2 (for example, super reach γ, etc.), for example, after executing the first half of the battle, shutter effect, blackout effect, first stage effect, second stage effect. , it may be possible to perform super reach γ, etc., in which late battle effects (super reach effects A to D) are performed without executing the movable body effect. In this super reach γ, an ally character may be damaged in the first half of the battle and remain in an inferior state, and then the super reach effect may develop. Furthermore, in the first half of the battle, a normal reach performance in which an ally character wins or loses is performed with a normal reach performance of variable patterns PA2-1 and PB1-1 or a normal reach performance of a variable pattern different from variable patterns PA2-1 and PB1-1. It may be possible.

(Preview performance)
As shown in Figure 11-6 (A) and Figure 11-7 (A), the preview performance starts variable display of decorative patterns based on any of super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, and the decorative pattern display starts. When variable display of decorative patterns is being performed in areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 of characters A to C corresponding to the determined production type are displayed near the central decorative pattern display area 5C. It's a performance. Preview production A displays a character image 175SG001 corresponding to character A for a predetermined time and ends, and preview production B displays a character image 175SG001 corresponding to character A for a predetermined time and then displays a character image 175SG002 corresponding to character B. The preview effect C displays the character image 175SG001 corresponding to character A for a predetermined time, then switches to the character image 175SG002 corresponding to character B and displays it for a predetermined time, and then displays the character image 175SG002 corresponding to character B for a predetermined time. The character image 175SG003 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then the process ends.

In this way, the preview performances A to C are suggestive performances that suggest the types of characters that will appear in the first half of the battle and the second half of the battle by switching and displaying multiple types of character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 (suggestive images). , it is set such that the greater the number of characters that are switched and displayed, the higher the jackpot expectation level (jackpot expectation level; preview performance C > preview performance B > preview performance A).

As shown in FIGS. 11-11(B) and (C), from the time the display of character image 175SG001 of character A is started until the display ends, or until the display of the next character image 175SG002 of character B is started. The display time tf is approximately 3000 ms, and the display time tf from the start of display of character image 175SG002 of character B until the end of the display or the start of display of the next character image 175SG003 of character C. is approximately 3000 ms, and the display time tf from the start of display of character image 175SG003 of character C to the end of the display is approximately 3000 ms, and the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 of each character A to C are approximately 3000 ms. All display times are the same. Further, the size of each character image 175SG001 is approximately the same, and the display color is a display color unique to each character.

Note that the display time tf from the start of displaying the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 of one character until the start of displaying the character image of the next character is not limited to the above-mentioned 3000 ms, and can be changed in various ways. It is. In addition, the display time tf may be set differently for each character. For example, the display time tf of the character image 175SG003, which has a high expectation of a jackpot when it appears, is set to the display time tf of the character image 175SG001 and the character image 175SG002. It may be set longer than the display time tf.

(First half of battle)
In the first half of the battle, as shown in Figures 11-6 (B) (C) and 11-7 (B), the variable display mode changes to the reach display mode, and the character image 175SG004 "Reach!" is displayed and the normal reach is reached. It starts at the timing when the performance starts. Specifically, the character images 175SG001 corresponding to the friendly characters A to C and the character image 175SG005 of the enemy character appear to start a battle, and the shutter effect and blackout effect described later start without the battle being resolved. The process ends when the process is completed. In other words, the results of the battle will be carried over to the second half of the battle, which will be described later.

(Shutter effect and blackout effect)
As shown in FIG. 11-6(C), the shutter effect is performed on the left and right sides of the display area of the image display device 5 when the first half of the battle effect is started in the variable display of decorative symbols based on super reach β1 and β2. After a shutter image 175SG006 imitating a shutter is displayed in a manner that moves back and forth in the left and right direction, a shutter image 175SG006 in which the left and right shutters are closed is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-6(D). This makes it difficult to visually recognize the variable display images of decorative symbols, character images 175SG001, 175SG005, etc. that are being executed, that is, it is an effect that makes it difficult to recognize the first half of the battle that is being executed.

Furthermore, when the shutter effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display images (variable display images of decorative patterns, character images 175SG001, 175SG005, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 using the shutter image 175SG006. In addition to making it difficult to see and darkening the display screen, the volume of the performance sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered than the volume during the first half of the battle performance, and furthermore, the game area, the movable body 32, The first half of the battle performance is made difficult to recognize by lowering the light intensity of various light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided on the glass door frame or the gaming machine frame 3 compared to the light intensity during the first half of the battle performance ( (See Figure 11-9(A)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5, the shutter effect that makes it difficult to see the display area of the image display device 5 and reduces the volume and light intensity is performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after starting the shutter effect). The execution period ta2 of the shutter effect in Super Reach α2 is set to be longer than the execution period ta1 of the shutter effect in Super Reach α1. There is (ta1<ta2).

As shown in FIG. 11-7(C), in the blackout effect, when the first half of the battle effect is started in the variable display of decorative symbols based on super reach β1 and β2, the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is By entering the black display state, it is difficult to visually recognize the variable display image of the decorative pattern being executed, the character images 175SG001, 175SG005, etc., that is, it is an effect that makes it difficult to recognize the first half effect of the battle that is being executed.

In addition, when starting the blackout effect, the effect control CPU 120 also controls the display images (variable display images of decorative patterns, character images 175SG001, 175SG005, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the form of a black screen. ) is made difficult to see, the display screen is darkened, and the volume of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered than the volume during the normal reach effect. , the first half of the battle performance is recognized by lowering the light intensity of the performance light of various light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the glass door frame or the gaming machine frame 3 than the light intensity during the first half of the battle performance. difficult (see Figure 11-9(A)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-5, a blackout effect that makes it difficult to see the display image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and reduces the volume and light intensity starts the blackout effect. It continues until a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds or 9 seconds) has elapsed since then, and the execution period ta4 of the blackout effect in Super Reach β2 is better than the execution period ta4 of the blackout effect in Super Reach β1. A time longer than the execution period ta3 is set (ta3<ta4).

In addition, the execution periods ta3 and ta4 of the blackout effect are set to be longer than the execution periods ta1 and ta2 of the shutter effect, so the longer the execution period of the shutter effect or the blackout effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. (ta1=3 seconds<ta2=5 seconds<ta3=7 seconds<ta4=9 seconds). Therefore, the player comes to expect that the blackout effect will be executed for a longer period of time than the shutter effect, so that the player can maintain attention to the shutter effect and the blackout effect. Further, in the execution periods ta3 and ta4 of the blackout effect, a precursor effect may be performed to foretell that the first stage effect or the second stage effect will start.

Further, as described above, the method of darkening the display screen of the image display device 5 is to block the light emitted from the backlight toward the front by using the liquid crystal layer if the image display device 5 is a liquid crystal display device. All you have to do is increase the blocking rate or reduce the amount of light from the backlight. Further, if the image display device 5 is an EL panel using organic electroluminescence (organic EL), the driving voltage may be lowered. In other words, the display screen of the image display device 5 can be darkened (displayed as a black screen) by entering a low light emission state that reduces the amount of light output from the display screen of the image display device 5. Reducing the brightness (output level) means reducing the amount of light output from the display screen.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-9(A), in the characteristic part 175SG, the output amount (output level) of the screen brightness, volume, and light amount of the image display device 5 is set at the start of the shutter effect or blackout effect. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the output amount is not set to "0" (for example, black screen display, muting, lights out, etc.), the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The output amount of at least one of the brightness, volume, and light amount may be set to "0" (for example, displaying a black screen, muting the sound, turning off the lights, etc.).

(First stage performance and second stage performance)
As shown in Figure 11-6 (E) and Figure 11-7 (D), the first stage performance is performed after any of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 corresponding to the characters A to C that appeared in the first half of the battle performance is displayed. , is an effect in which the content of the lines spoken by the characters A to C is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a character image 175SG007, and is output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 11-6(F) and FIG. 11-7(E), the second-stage production displays the content of the lines spoken by the character in the display area of the image display device 5 as a character image 175SG008, following the first-stage production. At the same time, this is an effect that is output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figure 11-8 (A), the content of the dialogue in the first half of the battle is based on the battle situation of the first half of the battle (related to the first half of the battle), and is intended to express the character's enthusiasm for the second half of the battle. , the content of the dialogue in the latter half of the battle is said to represent the special move that is scheduled to be performed in the second half of the battle.

Specifically, in Super Reach α1, the line in the first stage is ``I'll do a good job... I'll settle it next time!'', and the line in the second stage is ``Strong Attack!''. In Super Reach α2, the line in the first stage is ``The battle is about to begin...we'll settle it next time!'', and the line in the second stage is ``Super Attack!''. In Super Reach β1, the line in the first stage is ``You're not alone...I'll show you my true power!'', and the line in the second stage is ``Ultra Attack!''. In Super Reach β2, the line in the first stage is ``I'm not alone...I'll show you everyone's power!'', and the line in the second stage is ``Miracle Attack!''.

In addition, the content of the dialogue in the first stage performance and second stage performance is said to be content that suggests that the victory expectation level (jackpot expectation level) of the battle performance is high in the order of Super Reach β2, Super Reach β1, Super Reach α2, and Super Reach α1. There is. In other words, the first part of the production is, "You're not alone...I'll show you everyone's power!", "You're not alone...I'll show you my true strength!", "The battle begins now...we'll settle it next time!" , "I'm going to do a good job...I'll settle it next time!" The victory expectation level (jackpot expectation level) is set high in the order of "Strong Attack!", "Super Attack!", and "Ultra Attack!". , "Miracle Attack!" have higher expectations of victory (expectations of jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 11-8(B), the lines in the first stage performance and the lines in the second stage performance are output separately. In addition, the lines of the first stage performance are divided into a first period th1 from timing ti1 when the first stage performance starts to timing ti2 when a predetermined time has elapsed, and a second period th2 from timing ti2 to timing ti3 after a predetermined time has elapsed. The lines of the second stage performance are output (displayed and audio) in two stages: the first predetermined period th3 from timing ti4 when the second stage performance starts to timing ti5 when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the second stage when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing ti5. The output (display and audio) is divided into a second predetermined period th4 up to timing ti6.

Note that the first period th1, the second period th2, the first predetermined period th3, and the second predetermined period th4 are all periods of the same length in the characteristic section 175SG, but the length of each period can be arbitrarily varied. For example, the execution period of the first stage performance (first period th1 + second period th2) and the execution period of the second stage performance (first predetermined period th3 + second predetermined period th4) may have different lengths. Good too.

Further, although the first period th1, the second period th2, the first predetermined period th3, and the second predetermined period th4 are different periods, the present invention is not limited to this, and each period One of the periods may partially overlap with the other period, for example, the display of the character image 175SG007 in the second period th2 starts before the display of the character image 175SG007 in the first period th1 ends. may be done.

Specifically, the lines in the first stage of Super Reach α1 are 9 characters "I'll do a good job..." in the first period th1, and 9 characters "I'll settle it next time!" in the second period th2. is output. As for the lines in the first stage of Super Reach α2, 9 characters are output in the first period th1, ``The battle begins now...'', and in the second period th2, 9 characters are output, ``We'll settle it next time!''. In the first stage of Super Reach β1, 7 characters are output in the first period th1, ``I'm not alone...'', and 11 characters are output in the second period th2, ``I'll show you my true power!'' Ru. As for the lines in the first stage of Super Reach β2, 7 characters are output in the first period th1, ``I'm not alone...'', and 12 characters are output in the second period th2, ``I'll show you everyone's power!'' .

Furthermore, as for the dialogue in the second stage of the super reach α1, the five characters "Strong" are output in the first period th1, and the five characters "Attack!" are output in the second period th2. As for the dialogue in the second stage of Super Reach α2, the four characters "Super" are output in the first period th1, and the nine characters "Attack!" are output in the second period th2. As for the dialogue in the second stage of super reach β1, the four characters "Ultra" are output in the first period th1, and the four characters "Attack!" are output in the second period th2. As for the dialogue in the second stage of Super Reach β2, the four characters "Miracle" are output in the first period th1, and "Attack!" is output in the second period th2.

In the case of super reach α1, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 (9 characters) is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3 (5 characters), and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2. The number of characters (9 characters) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4. In addition, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 (9 characters) is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second predetermined period th4 (5 characters), and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 (9 characters). ) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4.

In the case of super reach α2, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 (9 characters) is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3 (4 characters), and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first period th3 (4 characters). The number of characters (9 characters) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4. Furthermore, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 (9 characters) is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second predetermined period th4 (5 characters), and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 (9 characters). ) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4.

In the case of super reach β1, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 (7 characters) is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3 (4 characters), and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 The number of characters (11 characters) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4. Further, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 (7 characters) is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second predetermined period th4 (5 characters), and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 (11 characters). ) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4.

In the case of super reach β2, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 (7 characters) is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3 (4 characters), and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first period th3 (4 characters). The number of characters (12 characters) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4. Furthermore, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 (7 characters) is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second predetermined period th4 (5 characters), and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 (12 characters). ) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4.

In this way, for each super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3, and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 is The number of characters displayed is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second predetermined period th4. Further, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second predetermined period th4, and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second predetermined period th4. number of characters. Furthermore, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 and second period th2 of the first stage performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3 and second predetermined period th4 of the second stage performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-8 (A), the manner in which the lines are displayed in the first stage performance is different from the manner in which the lines are displayed in the second stage performance. It is arranged to be displayed in a display mode with a higher degree of emphasis than the mode.

For example, in the first stage effect, the background screen of the image display device 5 and the character image 175SG003 are displayed in a dark manner, and the character image 175SG007 consisting of multiple characters (for example, "You are not alone...") is displayed in the first period th1. The character image 175SG007 consisting of multiple characters (for example, "I'll show you everyone's power!") is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes larger and brighter (fade-in) in the second period th2. In addition, it is displayed in a brighter manner (fade-in). In addition, as shown in Figure 11-10(C), the character image 175SG007 (for example, "I'm not alone...I'll show you everyone's power!") is displayed the largest and brightest, and then gradually becomes smaller. Moreover, it is displayed in a darkened manner (fade out) and eventually disappears. Note that the character image 175SG007 may be moved while fading in or fading out.

On the other hand, in the second stage performance, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter manner than in the first stage performance, and a plurality of character images 175SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "mi", "ra", "ku", "ru") are displayed. ) is displayed (dynamically displayed) as it rotates and moves sequentially from the right side of the display screen toward the center in the first predetermined period th3, and a plurality of character images 175SG008 ( For example, "a", "ta", "tsu", "ku", "!") are displayed (frame-in) so that they rotate from the bottom of the display screen toward the center during the second predetermined period th4 ( dynamic display). In addition, as shown in Figure 11-10 (G), after the character image 175SG008 (for example, "Miracle Attack!") is displayed the largest and brightest, it moves radially toward the surroundings and then , and eventually disappears outside the display screen (frame-out).

Note that the character images 175SG008 displayed in the second predetermined period th4 are all the same characters "Attack!", but the colors, shapes, etc. may be made different depending on the type of super reach.

As shown in Figure 11-8(A), the character image 175SG007 in the first stage effect is small, flat (two-dimensional), moves slowly (speed of change in display mode due to fade-in), and is displayed with low brightness. (See Figures 11-10(A) to (C)). On the other hand, the character image 175SG008 in the second stage rendering is larger, three-dimensional (three-dimensional), faster in movement (speed of change in display mode (moving speed) due to frame-in), and higher in brightness than the character image 175SG007 in the first stage rendering. will be displayed (see Figures 11-10 (E) to (G)).

Furthermore, if the maximum size and brightness of the character image 175SG008 in the later stage performance are larger and brighter than the maximum size and brightness of the character image 175SG007 in the front stage stage effect, then the character image at the time of fade-in or frame-in The size and brightness of a portion of the image may have an inverse relationship. Further, although the contents of the lines are different between the first stage performance and the second stage performance, at least a part of the content may be the same.

In this way, the degree of emphasis is higher when the size of the character image that makes up the serif is larger than when it is small, the degree of emphasis is higher when the shape is three-dimensional than the one that is two-dimensional, and the degree is emphasized when the character image is fast rather than slow. It can be said that the degree of emphasis is higher when the brightness is higher than when the brightness is low. In addition, although the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image have been exemplified in the latter stage rendering with a higher degree of emphasis than the earlier stage rendering, the present invention is not limited to this, and the latter stage rendering It is sufficient that the degree of emphasis of at least one of the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image is higher than that of the character image of the preceding stage effect. In addition to the above, for example, the degree of emphasis includes, for example, for the thickness of characters, thicker ones are higher than thin ones, and for colors, higher saturation and brightness are higher than lower ones. Good too. Furthermore, in addition to the display mode of the character image itself, the degree of emphasis may be increased by displaying a special image such as an effect image around the character image.

In addition, in super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, the execution periods tb1 to tb4 of the first stage performance are all the same time, but they may be different depending on the type of super reach. Further, although the execution periods tc1 to tc4 of the subsequent stages are all the same time, they may be different depending on the type of super reach.

(Switching effect)
As shown in Figures 11-11 to 11-13, the switching effect is performed after the first stage effect and before starting the second stage effect or the second half of the battle effect in the variable display of decorative symbols based on super reach β1 and β2. This is an effect that is executed to switch and display character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 (specific images) corresponding to a plurality of types of characters A to C. In addition, since the switching effect is executed in super reach β1 and β2, but not in super reach α1 and α2, when it is executed, either super reach effect C or super reach effect D, which will be described later, will be executed. will be notified.

In the switching effect, first a character image 175SG001 corresponding to character A is displayed, then the character image 175SG002 is switched to a character image 175SG002 corresponding to character B, and further switched to a character image 175SG003 corresponding to character C. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-11(A), the switching performance is started after the first stage performance ends, and the second stage performance is started after the switching performance ends. The display time of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 in the switching effect is a predetermined time (for example, 1000ms), and in the feature section 175SG, the display time of all character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 is the same, but depending on the character type It may be different. The display time tg may be set differently for each character. For example, the display time tg of the character image 175SG003, which has a high expectation of a jackpot when it appears, is set to the display time tg of the other character images 175SG001 and 175SG002. It may be set longer than the display time tg.

Furthermore, at the start of displaying each of the characters A to C, a blank image 175SG010 (see FIGS. 11-12(A), (E), and FIG. 11-13(I)), which is different from the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003, is displayed. After that, each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 is switched in multiple stages in the order of small image, medium image, and large image so that each character A to C gradually expands from the back side of the display screen to the front side. (See Figures 11-12 (B) to (D), (F) to (H), and Figures 11-13 (J) to (L)). Note that the display time tg of the small image, medium image, and large image of the blank image 175SG010 and each of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 is set to be the same (for example, 250 ms), but the display time of each image may be made different.

Also, regarding the small and medium images of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 (see Figures 11-12 (B) to (C), (F) to (G) and Figures 11-13 (J) to (K)) , while displaying a golden line image, a blank image 175SG010 and large images of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 (Figures 11-12 (A), (D), (E), (H) and Figures 11-13 ( For items I) and (L)), a blue image is displayed. In this way, a blank image 175SG010 is displayed at the start stage of the plurality of stages, a large image of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 is displayed at the end stage, and each character image 175SG001 is displayed at an intermediate stage between the start stage and the end stage. By making the display mode different from the small image and the medium image of ~175SG003, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the character image is changing and the timing of switching the character type.

In addition, in the switching effect, the visibility of the blank image 175SG010 and the small, medium, and large images of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 is reduced (for example, each image is masked), and the specific An image (for example, a pseudo light guide plate image) is superimposed on the front side of each image (for example, a display layer for displaying a pseudo light guide plate, which is a layer with a higher display priority than a normal display layer that displays a normal effect image). It may also be possible to execute a specific image effect (for example, a pseudo light guide plate effect) to be displayed. By doing this, for example, when comparing the light guide plate effect by the light guide plate device disposed on the front side of the image display device 5 and the above-mentioned pseudo light guide plate effect, in the pseudo light guide plate effect, unlike the light guide plate effect, the image It is possible to display a display similar to that of a light guide plate without reducing the visibility of the display. Furthermore, since there is no need to provide a light guide plate in the pseudo light guide plate effect, it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine.

In the feature section 175SG, the blank image 175SG010 displayed at the start stage is common to all characters A to C, but even if the blank image 175SG010 is displayed in a different display mode for each character A to C, good.

Furthermore, although the small and medium images of each of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 are displayed in gold, they may be displayed in a color other than gold. Further, although the blank image 175SG010 and the large images of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 displayed at the end stage are displayed in blue, they may be displayed in a color other than blue.

Further, although each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 is enlarged in three stages in the order of small image, medium image, and large image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character images are enlarged in two or less stages or four or more stages. It may be changed in stages. Furthermore, the display mode such as the posture and facial expression of the characters A to C may change while being enlarged, or the display mode and size may not change, but only the display color may change. Also, for example, for character C (specific image) that is displayed last, for example, by switching the display one more step from Figure 11-13 (L), so that the number of switches is greater than that for characters A and B. Alternatively, the display time tg1 may be made longer than the display time tg1 of the other characters A and B. Furthermore, multiple types of switching display patterns are set as switching display patterns for each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003, and one of the plurality of switching display patterns is determined for each character A to C, and the determined switching display Display may be performed based on a pattern.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-11(B) and (C), the character type that appears in the switching performance is the same as the character type that appears in the preview performance, but at the intermediate stage and end stage of the switching performance. The displayed character image is displayed larger than the character image displayed in the preview performance. Further, the character type that appears in the switching performance and the character type that appears in the preview performance do not necessarily have to be the same, and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the switching effect, the display time tg1 from the start of display of one of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 until the display is switched to another character image is 1000 ms, whereas the preview effect Here, the display time tf1 from when the display of one of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 is started until the display is switched to another character image is 3000 ms. Furthermore, the display color of each of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 is gold in the switching effect, whereas it is a normal color (for example, white) in the preview effect.

In this way, the period tg1 from when one character image is displayed to when the other character image is displayed in the switching performance is the same as the period tg1 from when one character image is displayed to the other character image in the preview performance. It is shorter than the period th1. In other words, the switching effect is not performed during Super Reach α1 and α2, but is performed during Super Reach β1 and β2, which have higher jackpot expectations than Super Reach α1 and α2, so the character image switching display is more effective than the preview performance. By being performed quickly, expectations for the jackpot can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 175SG, the display time tf1 of the character image in the preview performance and the display time tg1 of the character image in the switching performance are exemplified in such a manner that the display time tg1 is shorter than the display time tf1 for all character types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regarding the display time of at least one character image among the plurality of types of character images 175SG001 to 175SG003, the display time tg1 in the switching effect is longer than the display of the character image in the preview effect. It is sufficient if it is shorter than the time tf1. Further, as long as the display time tg1 in the switching effect is shorter than the display time tf1 of the character image in the preview effect, the display times tf1 and tg1 of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 may be different.

(Late battle performance)
The second half of the battle is performed after the moving body effect is executed in the normal reach effect, followed by the reach title effect that announces the developing super reach type, and finally the battle between characters A to C and the enemy character. This is an effect that informs whether or not the characters A to C will win against the enemy character. If the variable display result is a jackpot, an effect is executed in which characters A to C win against the enemy characters and it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot. If the variable display result is a loss, character A An effect is executed in which it is announced that ~C is defeated by the enemy character and the variable display result is a failure.

The details of the second half of the battle are not shown in detail, but the characters A to C perform attacks of the type displayed in the second half of the battle against the enemy characters. As shown in FIG. 11-9(B), in the case of super reach α1, super reach effect A is executed in which ally character A makes a “Strong Attack!” attack displayed in the later effect, and super reach effect α2 In the case of , super reach effect B is executed in which ally character B performs the "Super Attack!" attack displayed in the later effect, and in the case of super reach β1, ally character C is displayed in the later effect. Super Reach effect C that makes an attack of "Ultra Attack!" is executed, and in the case of Super Reach β2, three ally characters A to C perform a super attack of "Miracle Attack!" that is displayed in the latter part of the effect. Reach effect D is executed.

In addition, after the movable body performance ends and before any of the super reach performances A to D starts, the type of super reach performances A to D to be executed and the battle victory expectation level (jackpot expectation level) will be announced. The reach title effect (see FIG. 11-6 (H) and FIG. 11-7 (H)) is executed. Specifically, a character image 175SG020 representing the type of super reach effects A to D, an image 175SG021 representing the expected degree of victory in the battle (the expected degree of jackpot), and character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 representing the type of character performing the battle. , is displayed. In addition, in the image 175SG021 that represents the battle victory expectation level (jackpot expectation level), the expectation level is displayed by the number of stars (for example, 5 levels from 1 to 5), and the higher the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation level. .

As shown in Figure 11-9 (B), the jackpot expectation of Super Reach α1, α2, β1, and β2 is highest for Super Reach β2, and for Super Reach β2, Super Reach β1, Super Reach α2, and Super Reach α1. Since they are set in ascending order, the jackpot expectation of Super Reach Performances A to D is highest for Super Reach Performance D, followed by Super Reach Performance D, Super Reach Performance C, Super Reach Performance B, and Super Reach Performance A. It is set.

In addition, the execution period from the start to the end of the reach title performance is td1 for reach title A that announces the execution of super reach performance A, td2 for reach title B that announces the execution of super reach performance B, and td2 for reach title B that announces the execution of super reach performance B. The reach title C that announces the execution of the performance C is td3, the reach title D that announces the execution of the super reach performance D is td4, td1 and td2 have the same period, and td3 and td4 have the same period. be. Also, the execution periods td3 and td4 of reach titles C and D corresponding to super reach β1 and β2 are set longer than the execution periods td1 and td2 of reach titles A and B corresponding to super reach α1 and α2. (td1=td2<td3=td4).

In addition, the execution period from the start to the end of the super reach effect is te1 for super reach effect A, te2 for super reach effect B, te3 for super reach effect C, te4 for super reach effect D, and te1. te2 has the same period, and te3 and te4 have the same period. In addition, the execution periods te3 and te4 of super reach effects C and D corresponding to super reach β1 and β2 are set longer than the execution periods te1 and te2 of super reach effects A and B corresponding to super reach α1 and α2. (te1=te2<te3=te4).

(display screen, sound, light output level)
As mentioned above, in Super Reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, the first half of the battle effect starts in the normal reach effect, and after the shutter effect or blackout effect makes it difficult to recognize the first half of the battle effect, the first stage effect, the switching effect, etc. (None for super reach α1 and α2), subsequent stage performance and movable body performance are executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-9(A), in the first half of the battle, the brightness (brightness) of the display screen of the image display device 5, the output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (voice of dialogue and sound effects), The brightness of each LED is set to a medium level (ML), but when it becomes difficult to recognize the first half of the battle due to shutter effects or blackout effects, the brightness of the display screen of the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, The output sound from 8R and the brightness of various LEDs are reduced from the middle level (ML) to the lowest level (LL), making the performance quieter.

Next, when the first stage effect is started, the brightness of the display screen of the image display device 5, the output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the brightness of various LEDs rise to a level slightly lower than the intermediate level (ML). Furthermore, during the execution period of the switching performance, the display, sound, and light output levels increase step by step, and from the latter stage performance to the movable body performance, the display, sound, and light output levels rise to the highest level (HL). This makes the performance lively. Thereafter, when the super reach develops, each output level returns to the intermediate level (ML).

In the above, when the first half of the battle is executed, in the case of the normal reach variation pattern, the battle will be won or lost without being carried over to the second half, while in the case of the super reach variation pattern, the battle will be carried over to the second half. Different. At this time, the shutter effect and blackout effect make it difficult to recognize the first half of the battle that is currently being executed, so by purposely making the effect quieter than the first half of the battle that was currently in progress, we are aiming for the second half of the battle. This makes it possible to suitably enliven the performance.

In this way, in the normal reach effect, the display, sound, and light output levels drop to the lowest level in response to the shutter effect or blackout effect making it difficult to recognize the first half of the battle effect, and then, over time, By increasing the output level step by step, the production becomes more exciting in stages, so it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectations for any of the super reach performances A to D to be executed. .

(effect)
As explained above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 175SG, it is possible to control the jackpot game state that is advantageous for the player, and the production control CPU 120 controls the normal reach of super reach α1, α2, β1, β2. In the production, a shutter production, a blackout production, a pre-stage production (first information display production) that displays first information composed of a first number of information, and a pre-stage production (first information display production) that can be executed after the pre-stage production, and the first number is A second stage effect (second information display effect) of displaying second information composed of a second number of information different from the second information can be executed, and the second information is emphasized more than the display mode of the first information. The first information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and displayed in sequence in the first stage performance, and the second information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and displayed in sequence in the second stage performance. The number of characters displayed in the first period th1 and second period th2 of the first stage performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3 and second predetermined period th4 of the second stage performance.
According to this feature, since the second information has a smaller amount of information than the first information and is displayed in an emphasized manner, it creates a sense of expectation that the first stage effect and the second stage effect will control the jackpot gaming state. It can be improved step by step. Specifically, it is possible to display information in a more emphasized manner by displaying information with a small number of characters in a larger size than by displaying information with a large number of characters in a smaller size, so that the presentation can be enhanced step by step.

Furthermore, the manner in which the display of the first information is ended in the first stage performance (for example, a fade-out manner) and the manner in which the display of the second information is ended in the second information display performance (for example, a frame-out manner) ) is different.
According to this feature, since the manner in which the display ends is different between the first information and the second information, the expectations for being controlled to a jackpot gaming state by the first stage performance and the second stage performance are gradually improved. Can be done.

Furthermore, the manner in which the display of the first information is started in the first stage performance (for example, a fade-in manner) and the manner in which the display of the second information is started in the second stage performance (for example, a frame-in manner) are different. different.
According to this feature, since the manner in which the first information and the second information are started to be displayed is different, it is possible to gradually improve expectations for being controlled in an advantageous state by the first stage performance and the second stage performance. can.

In addition, after the first stage performance and before starting the second stage performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a switching performance in which character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 (specific images) corresponding to multiple types of characters A to C are switched and displayed. It is doable.
According to this feature, by executing a switching performance in which character images are switched and displayed before transitioning from the first stage performance to the second stage performance, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is gradually improved. Can be done.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute super reach performances A to D, and can execute reach title performances A to D as notification performances that notify that the super reach performance will be executed after the subsequent stage performance. . According to this feature, expectations for the super reach effects A to D can be increased.

Further, the execution period td1 to td4 of the reach title performance is shorter than the execution period tb1 of the first stage performance and the execution period tc1 of the second stage performance. According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the notification effects from becoming redundant while improving expectations for the super reach effects A to D.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sequentially moves a plurality of character images 175SG008 (for example, "mi", "ra", "ku", "ru") consisting of one character from the right side of the display screen toward the center in the first predetermined period th3. By being able to display (dynamic display) as if it were rotating and moving (frame-in), the presentation effect can be improved.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 can step-by-step enliven the first stage performance and the second stage performance by making the output levels of display, sound, and light higher for the second stage performance compared to the first stage performance.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 175SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the normal reach performance in super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, the shutter performance, the blackout performance, the super reach performance A, B, and the super reach performance. It is possible to execute super reach performances C and D, switching performances, and preview performances A to C, which suggest that the rate of control to the jackpot gaming state is higher than when performances A and B are executed, After starting the shutter effect or blackout effect, the output levels of display, sound, and light are lowered, and then the switching effect is executed in the case of super reach β1 and β2.
According to this feature, when super reach effects C and D are executed, after a predetermined period in which the predetermined image is made difficult to see due to the blackout effect and the output of sound and light is suppressed, character images A to D are executed. By executing a switching performance in which C is switched and displayed, expectations for being controlled to a jackpot gaming state can be gradually improved.

In addition, in the switching production, the display period tg1 from when one character image is displayed to when the other character image is displayed is the display period tg1 from when one character image is displayed to the other character image in the preview performances A to C. It is shorter than the display period tf1 until the image is switched and displayed.
According to this feature, when super reach effects C and D are executed, after a predetermined period in which a predetermined image is made difficult to see due to the blackout effect and the output of sound and light is suppressed, the preview effects A to D are executed. By executing a switching effect in which character images are switched and displayed faster than in C, expectations for being controlled to a jackpot gaming state can be gradually improved.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of switching and displaying character images larger than the character images in the preview performances A to C in the switching performance. According to this feature, by executing a switching effect that switches and displays character images larger than the preview effects A to C, it is possible to gradually improve expectations for being controlled into a jackpot game state. .

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a shutter performance that reduces the sound output in a first period and a blackout performance that reduces the sound output in a second period that is longer than the first period, and achieves super reach. Execute a blackout effect before the effect is executed.
According to this feature, the blackout effect makes certain images difficult to see and the output of sound and light is suppressed in some cases for a short period and some for a long period, creating an expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. can be suitably improved.

In addition, the expectation of a jackpot is higher in Super Reach β1 and β2, where the blackout effect is executed, than in Super Reach α1, α2, where the shutter effect is executed, so during the period when the output of sound and light is suppressed. It can draw attention.

Further, the plurality of types of specific images in the switching effect include at least a first specific image and a second specific image having a similar aspect to the first specific image (for example, a small image, a medium image, and a large image. 13(I) to (L)), one character image changes by switching and displaying it, thereby improving the presentation effect.

In addition, the blank image 175SG010 and the large images of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 are displayed in blue, and the small and medium images of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 are displayed in gold, so that changes in character images and types The switching becomes easier to understand.

In addition, the execution periods te3 and te4 of super reach effects C and D corresponding to super reach β1 and β2 are set longer than the execution periods te1 and te2 of super reach effects A and B corresponding to super reach α1 and α2. (te1=te2<te3=te4), it is possible to suppress super reach effects A and B from becoming redundant even though the switching effect is not executed.

(Characteristic part 175SG modification example 1)
Next, the first modification of the characteristic portion 175SG will be described based on FIGS. 11-14. FIGS. 11-14 (A) and (B) are timing charts showing an example of a super reach performance operation in the first modification of the characteristic portion 175SG.

In the embodiment described above, the display, sound, and light output levels in the normal reach performance in super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2 are increased in stages at multiple timings, as shown in FIG. 11-9(A). Although the present invention is not limited thereto, as shown in FIG. 11-14(A), the output level of at least one of display, sound, and light (for example, display and sound), It may be made to gradually increase during the period from the start of the first stage performance until the end of the second stage performance. In addition, the output levels of display, sound, and light do not necessarily have to rise to the highest level in the subsequent performance.

In addition, during the period from the start of the shutter effect or blackout effect to the start of the first stage effect, the output levels of display, sound, and light were lowered to the lowest level, but for example, the sound may be silent. However, music or the like may be played back at a predetermined volume level (for example, the lowest level). Also, in the first stage performance and the second stage performance, the audio of the lines may be output while the music is being played.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the display, sound, and light output levels are reduced to an intermediate level with the start of the super reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output level of the display, sound, and light is You can move to the super reach effect while maintaining the level increased in , or if the level does not rise to the highest level in the later stage effect, the level can be further increased after moving to the super reach effect. good.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, in response to the shutter effect or blackout effect making it difficult to recognize the first half of the battle effect, the display, sound, and light output levels are reduced to the lowest level, and then as time passes. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the output level is increased in stages to enhance the performance in stages, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-14(B), Before performing the performance, when performing an inciting performance that suggests the execution of a movable body performance, for example, the movable body 32 may be operated in accordance with the output level of at least one of display, sound, and light. .

Specifically, when moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the first position and then to the second position in the movable body performance, in the first stage performance before the movable body performance, the movable body 32 is moved between the origin position and the first position. In the second stage performance, the movable body 32 is moved back and forth between the origin position and the first position at a higher speed than in the first stage performance, and in the movable body performance, the movable body 32 is moved back and forth between the origin position and the first position. move to position. In this way, by increasing the operating speed of the movable body 32 in stages, the performance may be enhanced in stages.

Furthermore, although a mode in which the moving speed of the movable body 32 is increased stepwise is illustrated here, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the moving speed, the moving distance, and the number of operations of the movable body 32 is increased. By increasing the number of stages in stages, the performance can be enhanced in stages.

In addition, when performing other performances such as the above-mentioned movable body performances in parallel with the first stage performance and the second stage performance, for example, at least one of the display, sound, and light output levels can be output in accordance with the other performances. However, other levels may be output in accordance with the first stage performance or the second stage performance.

(Characteristic part 175SG modification example 2)
Next, a second modification of the characteristic portion 175SG will be described based on FIGS. 11-15. In FIGS. 11-15, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special effect example, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special effect example.

The shutter effect, which is a special effect that makes it difficult to recognize the effect being executed, has been exemplified in the form of making the displayed image difficult to see by displaying the shutter image 175SG006, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the variable display mode becomes the reach display mode as shown in FIG. 11-15(A), the shutter image 175SG006 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 11-15(B) and (C). Alternatively, the variable display image of the decorative pattern may be made difficult to visually recognize by displaying an increasing number of effect images 175SG030 that cut the display screen.

In addition to the above-mentioned presentation images that make it difficult to visually recognize the displayed image, examples of presentation images that make it difficult to visually recognize the displayed image include presentation images that are different in form from the variable display image of the displayed decorative pattern, and movable images that imitate the movable body 32, etc. It may be a moving image of a body image falling, a moving image of the glass covering the display screen breaking, a moving image of stones, coins, etc. being stacked, and can be changed in various ways. .

In addition, although the blackout effect in the above-mentioned embodiment has been exemplified in which the displayed image is made difficult to recognize by turning the display screen into a black screen state, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the variable display mode changes to the reach display mode as shown in Figure 11-15 (D), the display screen gradually changes to a white screen as shown in Figures 11-15 (E) and (F). The displayed image may be made difficult to visually recognize by changing the display image, or by fading out or frame-out the displayed image.

(Characteristic part 175SG modification example 3)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 175SG will be described based on FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17. FIGS. 11-16 (A) to (H) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of super reach performance operations as modified examples. Similarly, in FIGS. 11-17, (I) to (L) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of super reach performance operations as modified examples.

In the embodiment described above, the first stage performance and the second stage performance are performed before the movable body performance starts, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first stage performance and the second stage performance are performed after the movable body performance starts. It may also be executed.

To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 11-16, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the variable display of super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2. At this time, if execution of a preview performance is determined, any of preview performances A to C is executed (see FIG. 11-16(A)). Next, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is set to the ready-to-reach display mode, and the normal ready-to-reach effect is started (see FIG. 11-16(B)).

Next, a blackout effect is executed during the execution of the normal reach effect (see Figure 11-16 (C)), and after the display screen becomes a black screen, the display screen becomes slightly brighter, and then the character image 175SG003 fades in. (See Figures 11-16 (D) and (E)). Next, after the switching effect is executed (see FIG. 11-16(F)), a character image 175SG040 (for example, "fierce battle") indicating the expectation level of the super reach effect is displayed (see FIG. 11-16(G)). (see FIG. 11-16(H)), and the movable object effect is executed (see FIG. 11-16(H)).

After that, the blackout effect is executed again (see Figure 11-17 (I)), and after the display screen becomes a black screen, the display screen becomes slightly brighter, and then the character image 175SG003 and the character image 175SG007 of the preceding serif appear. The character image 175SG008 of the second line is then displayed and the first stage effect is executed (see FIG. 11-17(J)), and the second stage effect is executed (see FIG. 11-17(K)). Then, the super reach effect develops, and the reach title effect is executed (see FIG. 11-17(L)).

Although the characteristic portion 175SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and changes and additions may be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. are also included in the present invention.

(Explanation regarding transformation and application)
In addition, in the characteristic section 175SG, a form is illustrated in which information consisting of characters as dialogue of a character image is applied as an information display effect that suggests that the control is in an advantageous state by displaying information, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the information can be displayed, it may include not only characters but also at least one of numbers, symbols, designs, pictures, etc.

In addition, information is not limited to information consisting of multiple characters that make up a line of dialogue, but any information that can be displayed that suggests control in an advantageous state can be obtained from a series of lines or sentences. It does not have to be information consisting of a word, or it may be information consisting of a single letter or number.

Further, in the feature section 175SG, the information display performance is composed of a first stage performance (first information display performance) and a second stage performance (second information display performance), but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be composed of three or more performances instead of a single one. Furthermore, the content of the second information displayed in the second information display effect does not have to be the content that follows the content of the first information displayed in the first information display effect, as in the embodiment described above. For example, the information may have a content different from the first information.

Further, in the feature section 175SG, the number of characters (second number) of the second information is smaller than the number of characters (first number) of the first information, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of characters in the first information and the second information may be the same, or the second number in the second information may be greater than the first number in the first information. Further, the display manner of the first information and the display manner of the second information may be different or may be the same.

In addition, in the feature section 175SG, as a special effect that switches and displays multiple types of specific images, switching effects and preview effects A to C that switch and display multiple types of character images that appear in the super reach effect are applied. Although the form is shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image may be different from the character image, and can be arbitrarily changed. For example, an image related to each type of super reach may be used. It is preferable that

In addition, although the switching performance has been exemplified in a form in which a common aspect of performance can be executed for super reach β1 and β2, the present invention is not limited to this, and that , the display mode of switching may be different depending on the type of super reach.

In addition, the feature section 175SG applies super reach performances A and B as first specific performances that suggest that the control is to be in a jackpot gaming state, and the state is in a jackpot gaming state more than when the first specific performance is executed. Although we have exemplified the form in which super reach C and D are applied as the second specific performance that suggests that the rate of control is high, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Super reach performance C is applied as a first specific performance that suggests, and super reach D is applied as a second specific performance that suggests that the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when the first specific performance is executed. May be applied.

In addition, in the feature section 175SG, a form in which super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2 can be executed in which the first stage performance and the second stage performance are executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first stage performance It may also be possible to execute other types of super reach in which the following effects are not executed.

Further, in the feature section 175SG, although the first stage performance and the second stage performance can be executed only with super reach, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be executed with normal reach or non-reach. It's okay. Furthermore, it may be possible to execute the performance during a jackpot, which is different from the performance during variable display.

In addition, in the feature section 175SG, as a pachinko game machine, the so-called type 1 type 2 can be controlled to a jackpot game state by generating a V prize triggered by a small win in a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A or jackpot B. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the gameplay can be changed in various ways as long as it is a game machine that can generate a super reach. A so-called pachinko game machine or the like that can be controlled to a variable state after the game ends may be applied.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls is The loaned balls that are recirculated inside the machine and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added up, while the number of game balls used in the game is counted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the value is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance that displays a predetermined image and outputs sound at a predetermined volume;
special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see;
A first specific performance that is executable after the special performance and that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state, and a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first specific performance is executed. a second specific performance that suggests; a specific performance execution means capable of executing;
When executing the second specific effect, a special notification effect can be executed to notify that the second specific effect will be executed after the special effect and before starting the second specific effect. Special notification performance execution means,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect that suggests control to the advantageous state by switching and displaying a plurality of types of suggestion images;
Equipped with
Lowering the sound output below the predetermined volume for a predetermined period after executing the special effect,
The special notification performance execution means notifies that the second specific performance will be executed by switching and displaying a plurality of types of specific images,
In the special notification effect, the period from when one specific image is displayed to when it is switched to another specific image is the period from when one specific image is displayed to when it is switched to another specific image in the above-mentioned suggestion effect. It is shorter than the period until it is displayed.
The special notification performance execution means is capable of switching and displaying a specific image larger than the suggestion image ,
The specific image is an image that includes a character,
The special notification performance execution means is capable of displaying an image that does not include a character when switching from one specific image to another specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images